Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT21 Monitor User's Manual PDF

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor)

-GT27 model -GT25 model -GT25 open frame model -GT25 wide model -GT25 rugged model -GT23 model -GT21 model -GT21 wide model -Handy GOT -GT SoftGOT2000 (Multiple channels)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Be sure to read these instructions before using this product.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances. Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety. Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off.

Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch. An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident. An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning. Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.

When the GOT backlight has a failure, the GOT status will be as follows. Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction. [GT27, GT25, GT23] The POWER LED blinks (orange/blue), the display section dims, and inputs by a touch switch are disabled. [GT2105-Q] The POWER LED blinks (orange/blue), and the display section dims. However, inputs by a touch switch are still available. [GT2107-W, GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] The display section dims. However, inputs by a touch switch are still available. Even if the display section dims, inputs by a touch switch may still be available. This may cause an unintended operation of the touch switch. For example, if an operator assumes that the display section has dimmed because of the screen save function and touches the display section to cancel the screen save, a touch switch may be activated. The GOT backlight failure can be checked with a system signal of the GOT. (This system signal is not available on GT2107-W, GT2104-R, GT2104-P, and GT2103-P.)

WARNING

CAUTION

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

1

2

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING The display section of the GOT is an analog-resistive type touch panel.

When multiple points of the display section are touched simultaneously, an accident may occur due to incorrect output or malfunction. [GT27] Do not touch three points or more simultaneously on the display section. Doing so may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction. [GT25,GT23,GT21] Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the display section. Doing so may operate the switch located around the center of the touched point, or may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by the GOT are changed, be sure to reset the GOT, or turn on the unit again after shutting off the power as soon as possible. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT, communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative. For bus connection (GT27 and GT25 only): The GOT becomes inoperative. Power on the PLC CPU again to reestablish communication. For other than bus connection: The GOT becomes inoperative. A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the GOT and the system against unauthorized access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from unreliable networks and devices via network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions. Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving GOT trouble and system trouble by unauthorized access, DoS attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks. *1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading systems or exploiting vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS) state.

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring.

Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart. Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction.

Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver. Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section.

When the GOT connects to an Ethernet network, the IP address setting is restricted according to the system configuration. [GT27, GT25, GT23] When a GOT2000 series model and a GOT1000 series model are on an Ethernet network, do not set the IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GOTs and the controllers on this network. Doing so can cause IP address duplication at the GOT startup, adversely affecting the communication of the device with the IP address 192.168.0.18. The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system. [GT21] Setting the IP address (192.168.3.18) in the following system configurations can cause IP address duplication at GOT startup, adversely affecting communications of the device whose IP address is 192.168.3.18. The operation at IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system. When multiple GOTs connect to the Ethernet network: Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network. When one GOT connects to the Ethernet network: Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the controllers other than the GOT in the network.

When using the Ethernet interfaces, set an IP address for each interface to access a different network. Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT.

Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they communicate with the GOT.

When the GOT is subject to shock or vibration, or some colors appear on the screen of the GOT, the screen of the GOT might flicker.

WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or

removing the GOT main unit to/from the panel. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the option unit onto/from the GOT. (GT27,GT25 Only)

3

4

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual.

Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration. When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque

range with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2. [GT27, GT25-W, GT2512-S, GT2510-V, GT2508-V, GT23, GT2107-W] Specified torque range (0.36 N.m to 0.48 N.m) [GT2505-V, GT2105-Q] Specified torque range (0.30 Nm to 0.50 Nm) [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Specified torque range (0.20 Nm to 0.25 Nm) Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.

When mounting a unit on the GOT, tighten the mounting screws in the following specified torque range. [GT27, GT25 (except GT25-W)] When loading the communication unit or option unit other than wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.36 N.m to 0.48 N.m) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2. When loading the wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to the side interface of GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.10 N.m to 0.14 N.m) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.1. When the GOT is installed vertically, its side interface is positioned on the bottom. To prevent the falling of the wireless LAN communication unit from the side interface, install or remove the unit while holding it with hands. [GT25-W] When mounting the wireless LAN communication unit on the GOT, fit it to the wireless LAN communication unit interface and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.10 Nm to 0.14 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.1. [GT2103-P] When mounting the SD card unit on the GOT, fit it to the side of the GOT and tighten the tapping screws in the specified torque range (0.3 N.m to 0.6 N.m) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2. Under tightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

When closing the USB environmental protection cover, note the following points to ensure the IP rating. [GT27, GT25 (except GT25-W and GT2505-V)] Push the [PUSH] mark on the latch firmly to fix the cover to the GOT. [GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W, GT2505-V, GT2107-W] Push the USB mark on the latch firmly to fix the cover to the GOT. [GT2105-Q] Tighten the lower fixing screws of the cover in the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) to fix the cover to the GOT.

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Remove the protective film of the GOT.

When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed. In addition, for the models equipped with the human sensor function, using the GOT with the protective film may cause the human sensor not to function properly.

For GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, and GT2508F-V, attach an environmental protection sheet dedicated to the open frame model (sold separately) to the display section. Or, attach a user-prepared environmental protection sheet. Not doing so may damage or soil the GOT or cause foreign matter to enter the GOT, resulting in a failure or malfunction.

When installing the supplied fittings on GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, or GT2508F-V, tighten screws in the specified torque range (0.8 Nm to 1.0 Nm). Meld studs on the control panel to fasten the fittings. The studs must have strength adequate to withstand a tightening torque of 0.9 Nm or more. Make sure that no foreign matter such as welding waste is at and around the bases of the studs. Tighten nuts on the studs in the specified torque range (0.8 Nm to 0.9 Nm) with a wrench for M4 nuts. Undertightening a screw or nut may cause the GOT to drop, short-circuit, or malfunction. Overtightening a screw or nut may damage it or the GOT, causing the GOT to drop, short-circuit, or malfunction.

Do not operate or store the GOT in the environment exposed to direct sunlight, rain, high temperature, dust, humidity, or vibrations.

Although GT2507T-W is ruggedized for environments such as UV rays, temperatures and vibrations,its operation is not guaranteed in all conditions and environments. Make sure to use or store the GOT in an appropriate environment.

When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals, use the protective cover for oil. Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT.

Do not operate the GOT with its display section frozen. The water droplets on the display section may freeze at a low temperature. Touch switches and other input objects may malfunction if the display section is frozen.

5

6

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.

Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions. After installation, wiring, or other work, make sure to attach the back cover to the Handy GOT before

turning on the power and starting operation. Not doing so may cause an electrical shock.

The Handy GOT is designed to operate on DC power. Supply power to the power supply, operation switch, and emergency stop switch within the specifications. Not doing so may cause a fire or failure.

Correctly wire the 24 V DC power cable (terminal) of the Handy GOT and [+]/[-] of the DC power supply equipment as shown in this manual. Not doing so may cause a failure.

Ground the FG terminal of the Handy GOT with a ground resistance of 100 or less by using a drain wire that has a cross-sectional area of 2 mm2 or more. Do not use common grounding with higher voltage systems. Failure to observe these instructions may cause an electric shock or malfunction.

When making a connection cable or installing wiring, make sure that no chips or wire offcuts enter the Handy GOT. Not doing so may cause a fire, failure or malfunction.

CAUTION When grounding the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section, note the following

points. Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q] Make sure to ground the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section solely for the GOT (ground resistance: 100 or less, ground cable diameter: 1.6 mm or more). (GT2705-V, GT25- W, GT2505-V, GT2107-W, and GT2105-Q do not have the LG terminal.) [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Make sure to ground the FG terminal of the GOT power supply section with a ground resistance of 100 or less. (For GT2104-PMBLS and GT2103-PMBLS, grounding is unnecessary.)

When tightening the terminal screws, use the following screwdrivers. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q] Use a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] For the usable screwdrivers, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range.

[GT27, GT25, GT23] Specified torque range (0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm)

For a terminal processing of a wire to the GOT power supply section, use the following terminal. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q] Use applicable solderless terminals for terminal processing of a wire and tighten them with the specified torque. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction. [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Connect a stranded wire or a solid wire directly, or use a rod terminal with an insulation sleeve.

Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product. Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.

Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q] Specified torque range (0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm) [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Specified torque range (0.22 Nm to 0.25 Nm)

Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.

Some models have an ingress prevention label on their top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts, from entering the GOT during wiring. Do not peel this label during wiring. Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation.

Plug the communication cable into the GOT interface or the connector of the connected unit, and tighten the mounting screws and the terminal screws in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller(A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it "clicks". After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly. Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.

When you use the Handy GOT, run the connected cable in ducts or clamp the cable. Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

When you remove a cable from the Handy GOT, do not pull the cable portion. Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

7

8

[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Before testing the operation of a user-created screen (such as turning on or off a bit device, changing

the current value of a word device, changing the set value or current value of a timer or counter, and changing the current value of a buffer memory), thoroughly read the manual to fully understand the operating procedure. During the test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system. False output or malfunction can cause an accident.

WARNING When power is on, do not touch the terminals.

Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction. Correctly connect the battery connector.

Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire. Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.

Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all phases. Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit.

Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire. Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly.

Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure. The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.

Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull from the cable portion. Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock. A module damage may result.

Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit. Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery. If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using.

Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metals, etc. to discharge static electricity from human body, etc. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

Use the battery manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Use of other batteries may cause a risk of fire or explosion.

Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children.Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before replacing the battery or using the dip switch of the terminating resistor. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction by static electricity.

Before cleaning the GOT, be sure to turn off the power. Before cleaning, check the following items. (1) Ensure that there are no problems with the installation condition of the GOT to the control panel. (2) Ensure that there are no damages on the environmental protection sheet (not replaceable). If the environmental protection sheet peels or the cleaning solution enters between the sheet and the display section during cleaning, stop the cleaning immediately. In such a case, do not use the GOT.

CAUTION For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required.

However, the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses.When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute the touch panel calibration.

When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be activated. This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction.

9

10

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USING A DATA STORAGE]

WARNING If the SD card is removed from drive A of the GOT while being accessed by the GOT, the GOT may

stop processing data for about 20 seconds. The GOT cannot be operated during this period.The functions that run in the background including a screen updating, alarm, logging, scripts, and others are also interrupted.Before removing the SD card, check the following items. [GT27, GT25, GT23(Excluding GT2505-V and GT25HS-V)] Before removing the SD card, check that the SD card access LED is off. [GT2505-V, GT25HS-V] Make sure to turn off the SD card access switch before removing the SD card. Not doing so may damage the SD card or files. [GT21] Disable the SD card access in the GOT utility, and then check that the SD card access LED is off before removing the SD card.

Do not remove the data storage from the file server (drive N) that is being accessed by the GOT, or the system operation may be affected. Before removing the data storage, check the relevant system signal to make sure that the data storage is not being accessed.

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USING A DATA STORAGE]

CAUTION If the data storage is removed from the GOT while being accessed by the GOT, the data storage and

files may be damaged. Before removing the data storage from the GOT, check the SD card access LED, system signal, or others to make sure that the data storage is not accessed.

Turning off the GOT while it accesses the SD card results in damage to the SD card and files. When using the GOT with an SD card inserted, check the following items.

[GT27, GT25, GT23(Excluding GT2505-V and GT25HS-V)] After inserting an SD card into the GOT, make sure to close the SD card cover. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written. [GT2505-V, GT25HS-V] After inserting an SD card into the GOT, make sure to turn on the SD card access switch. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written. [GT21] After inserting an SD card into the SD card unit, make sure to enable the SD card access in the GOT utility. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written.

When removing the SD card from the GOT, make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop out. Not doing so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.

When inserting a USB device into a USB interface of the GOT, make sure to insert the device into the interface firmly. Not doing so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.(GT27, GT25, and GT2107-W)

Before removing the data storage from the GOT, follow the procedure for removal on the utility screen of the GOT. After the successful completion dialog is displayed, remove the data storage by hand carefully. Not doing so may cause the data storage to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.

11

12

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USE]

CAUTION When you operate the Handy GOT while holding it, slide your hand through the hand strap on the

back of the GOT to prevent falling. The hand strap length is adjustable.

When you remove a cable from the Handy GOT, do not pull the cable portion. Doing so may damage the unit or cable, or cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

Do not drop or strike the Handy GOT. Doing so may damage the GOT.

When you carry or operate the Handy GOT, hold its body. Carrying or operating the Handy GOT while holding its cable may damage the unit or cable.

Determine whether to use the emergency stop switch of the Handy GOT according to your risk assessment.

If you use a parallel circuit (to avoid entering the emergency stop status while the Handy GOT is removed), the system may not conform to the safety standards. Check the safety standards required for your system before use.

If the Handy GOT is exposed to any impact beyond the general specifications, chattering may occur in the emergency stop switch for its structural reasons. Check that your use conditions are proper.

Do not touch the edges of the touch panel (display section) repeatedly. Doing so may result in a failure.

Do not turn off the GOT while data is being written to the storage memory (ROM) or SD card. Doing so may corrupt the data, rendering the GOT inoperative.

The GOT rugged model uses the environmental protection sheet (not replaceable) with UV protection function on the front surface. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the touch panel or the liquid crystal display panel that may be caused by ultraviolet rays. Note that if the rugged model is exposed to ultraviolet rays for an extended period of time, the front surface may turn yellow. If the rugged model is likely to be exposed to ultraviolet rays for an extended period of time, it is recommended to use a UV protective sheet (option).

[PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOTE CONTROL]

[PRECAUTIONS FOR EXCLUSIVE AUTHORIZATION CONTROL]

[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Remote control is available through a network by using GOT functions, including theSoftGOT-GOT

link function, the remote personal computer operation function, the VNC server function, and the GOT Mobile function. If you remotely operate control equipment using such functions, the field operator may not notice the remote operation, leading to an accident. In addition, a communication delay or interruption may occur depending on the network environment, and remote control of control equipment cannot be performed normally in some cases. Before using the above functions to perform remote control, fully grasp the circumstances of the field site and ensure safety.

When operating the server (GOT) of the GOT Mobile function to disconnect a client, notify the operator of the client about the disconnection beforehand. Not doing so may cause an accident.

WARNING Before using the GOT network interaction function to prevent simultaneous operations from multiple

pieces of equipment, make sure you understand the function. You can enable or disable the exclusive authorization control of the GOT network interaction function for each screen. (For all screens, the exclusive authorization control is disabled by default.) Properly determine the screens for which the exclusive authorization control is required, and set the control by screen. A screen for which the exclusive authorization control is disabled is operable simultaneously from multiple pieces of equipment. Make sure to determine the operation period for each operator, fully grasp the circumstances of the field site, and ensure safety to perform operations.

CAUTION When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.

When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations. (Refer to GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) for details of the battery directive in the EU member states.)

13

14

[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.

(Refer to GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) for details of the regulated models.) Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be

exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual, as they are precision devices. Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail.Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation.

When fumigants that contain halogen materials such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine are used for disinfecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects, they cause malfunction when entering our products. Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enterour products, or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation (heat method).Additionally, disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing products.

MEMO

15

16

CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Manuals for GT Works3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

CHAPTER 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITOR 37 1.1 Each Function and Related Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 1.2 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 1.3 Languages Available for Each Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 41 2.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 2.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

2.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 2.4 Operating Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

System configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Online module change screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 [Product information list] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 [Create file] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

CHAPTER 3 DEVICE MONITOR 55 3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 3.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Devices that can be monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Displaying the monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Names of each section of monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Display format of the monitor screen ([One large screen], [4 screens]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Destination path setting ([Connect]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Entering devices ([Register]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Deleting a device ([Delete]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Deleting devices at a time ([Delete all]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 File switching for comment display ([Change comment]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Screen transition (common operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

3.4 Entry Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 3.5 Batch Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 3.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 3.7 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 3.8 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

C O

N TE

N TS

CHAPTER 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 111 4.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 4.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Devices and range that can be monitored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

4.3 Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Setting ladder data storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Reading comment files from data storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Program update check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Setting the security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 User authentication function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

4.4 Setting Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Switching languages of sequence programs (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only) . . . 143 Switching comment display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Displayed contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Display in the sequence program monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Displayed contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Displayed contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

4.8 Find/Replace Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Device/Contact/Coil search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Factor search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Replace device (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Change open/close cantact (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

4.9 Test Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 How to operate device test window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

CHAPTER 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 189 5.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 5.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Devices and range that can be monitored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

5.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Setting SFC data storage location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Reading comment files from SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Setting Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

5.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Displayed contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

17

18

Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 5.5 How to Operate Block List Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Displayed contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Displayed contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

5.7 Test Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 5.8 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

CHAPTER 6 NETWORK MONITOR 229 6.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 6.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Network information that can be monitored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

6.3 Operations for display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 6.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Line monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Detailed monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Other station monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Other station communication status monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Other station data link status monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Other station parameter status monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Other station CPU operation status monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Other station CPU RUN status monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Other station loop status monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

6.5 Error Message and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

CHAPTER 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 281 7.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 7.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

7.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 7.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

System configuration screen layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Setting method for other station monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Monitor Menu screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Present Value Monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 SFC Error History screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Error List screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Error List Designated-Axis screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Positioning Monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Servo Monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Present Value History Monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

C O

N TE

N TS

Parameter setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Hard copy output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

7.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

CHAPTER 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 311 8.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 8.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

8.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Setting method for other station monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Composition of the intelligent module monitor screen and key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Specifying a module to monitor and selecting monitor menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Testing of the intelligent function module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

8.5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 8.6 Operating I/O Module Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Specifying the module to be monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Monitor screen configuration and key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

8.7 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

CHAPTER 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 353 9.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 9.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

9.3 Operations of Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Servo amplifier monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Monitor functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Alarm function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Diagnostics function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Test operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Hard copy output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

9.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

CHAPTER 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 401 10.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 10.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

10.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

19

20

Setting storage location for backup data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Security and password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Trigger backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Network batch backup/restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

10.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Main menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Progress screen (backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Data list (restoration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Progress screen (restoration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Controller list screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Controller selection screen (Restoration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Individual restoration screen (Restoration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

10.5 Backup Data Conversion Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 How to install and start Backup Data Conversion Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 How to use Backup Data Conversion Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

10.6 Errors and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

CHAPTER 11 MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING 467 11.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 11.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

11.3 Operation for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 11.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 11.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

CHAPTER 12 LOG VIEWER 475 12.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 12.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

12.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Screen transition when [View logged device] is selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Screen transition when [Manage log file] is selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

12.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 How to operate target setting window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 How to operate target selection screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 How to operate Main Menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 How to operate file selection screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

12.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Data log viewer screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Legend display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Upper and lower limit values setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Cursor position information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Selecting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 Searching data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

C O

N TE

N TS

Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 12.6 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

CHAPTER 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 507 13.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 13.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 Devices and range that can be monitored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

13.3 Operation for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Searching from the monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

13.4 Common Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 Information and key functions displayed on the screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 Hard copy output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

13.5 Switching the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Display switching of 16-bit (one-word)/32-bit (two-word) modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Display switching of decimal numbers/hexadecimal numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Switching comment/no-comment display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

13.6 Search Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 Device search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 Contact point search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Coil search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Step search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Ladder end search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 Defect search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

13.7 Test Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 Displaying the test menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

13.8 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

CHAPTER 14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 537 14.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 14.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 Devices and range that can be monitored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Readable motion SFC programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 Displayable character codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

14.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 Setting motion SFC program storage location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

14.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 SFC diagram monitor screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Detailed program window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 Step list window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 Active step list window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 Program batch monitor window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 Communication setting window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 Password input window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

21

22

CHAPTER 15 FX LIST EDITOR 557 15.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 15.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

15.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 15.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

Key arrangement and a list of key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 Selection and operation of modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 Sequence program display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 Searching commands and devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 Writing commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 Changing operands, set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Deleting commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 Sequence program all clear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 PLC diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 Keywords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 List monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 Hard copy output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 Action for an incorrect key input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586

15.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586

CHAPTER 16 R MOTION MONITOR 587 16.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 16.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

16.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 16.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

System configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 Setting procedure for monitoring other stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 Monitor menu screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Present value monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 Motion error history monitor screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 Error list designated-axis screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604 Positioning monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 Servo monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 Present value history monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 Parameter setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Hard copy output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

16.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

CHAPTER 17 CNC MONITOR 617 17.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 17.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621

C O

N TE

N TS

Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 17.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622 17.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 17.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

CHAPTER 18 CNC DATA I/O 627 18.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 18.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

18.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 18.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 18.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

CHAPTER 19 CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT 649 19.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 19.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650

19.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 19.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 19.5 Error Messages and Corrective actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660

CHAPTER 20 CNC MONITOR 2 661 20.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662 20.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666

20.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 20.4 Operating Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

CNC monitor 2 screen layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 Key input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

20.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676

CHAPTER 21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 677 21.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 21.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 21.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 21.4 Display Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

CHAPTER 22 iQSS UTILITY 693 22.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 22.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696

23

24

22.3 Preparing profile data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697 22.4 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698

Screen transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700 22.5 Operating Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

iQSS utility screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701 Device list information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 Monitoring information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705 Parameter information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709

22.6 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711

CHAPTER 23 DRIVE RECORDER 713 23.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 23.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718

23.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 Screen transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723

23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725 [Open] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729 [Select drive] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730 [File storage destination] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730 [Folder name] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731 [File name] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732 [Select channel] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733 [Select station] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733 [Input station No.] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733 [Input N/W No.] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734 [Input PLC No.] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734 [Select connection destination (servo)] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735 [Drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737 [Instantaneous monitor] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738 [Parameter] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 [System configuration] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740 [Trigger setting] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741

23.5 [Graph waveform] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751 [Graph setting] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 [Collection, trigger setting] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Operating procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764

23.6 [(At alarm occurrence)] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

CHAPTER 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 771 24.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 24.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 Station types and transition to extended functions available for the target modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774 Supported diagnostics items and station types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779

24.3 Operations for display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780

C O

N TE

N TS

24.4 Operation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784 Network configuration diagram screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784 [Select Diagnostics Destination] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 Context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790 [Legend] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792 Communication status monitor window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794 [Error Details] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 [Data Link Unperformed Station Monitor] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799 [Network Event History] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 [Station information list] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

24.5 Error Message and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810

CHAPTER 25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 813 25.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 25.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821

25.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 25.4 Operating Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825

Servo network configuration diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825 System Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 Alarm Display screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834 Create file screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837

25.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839

CHAPTER 26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 841 26.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841 26.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843

26.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844 26.4 Operating Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847

System configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847 [Program List] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849 [Program Editor] screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852

26.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855

CHAPTER 27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 857 27.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857 27.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859

27.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860 27.4 Operating Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862 27.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876

25

26

CHAPTER 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 877 28.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877 28.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882

28.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884 Screen transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887

28.4 [Graph waveform] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888 [Display axis setting] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891 [Display axis setting] window (detail setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893 [Copy setting] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895 [Graph setting] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897 [Parameter Display] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903 Operating procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904

28.5 [Setting, management] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909 [Select channel] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911 [Select station] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911 [Input station No.] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912 [Input N/W No.] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912 [Input PLC No.] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913 [Via (motion) setting] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914 [Collection, trigger setting] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915 [Measurement axis setting] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919 [Measurement axis setting] window (axis by axis setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 [Copy setting] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924 [Open] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926 [Select drive] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927 [Import] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928 [File storage destination] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929 [Folder name] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930 [File name] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931 [Memo] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931

CHAPTER 29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 933 29.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933 29.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934 Devices and range that can be monitored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935 Readable motion SFC programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935 Displayable character codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936

29.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937 Setting motion SFC program storage location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940

29.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941 SFC diagram monitor screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941 Detailed program window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945 Step list window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947 Active step list window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948

C O

N TE

N TS

Program batch monitor window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949 Communication setting window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950 Password input window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

CHAPTER 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 953 30.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953 30.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956 Restrictions depending on the access privilege of the account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960 Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961

30.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963 Screen transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965

30.4 [Sensor list display] Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967 [Connection setting] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969 [Logon] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970

30.5 View Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971 Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972 [Image view] screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974 [Graphic view] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975 [Composite view] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976 [Parameter view] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Graphic edit view screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979 Displayed window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 [Multi view] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 Hard copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988

REVISIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .989 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .993 Intellectual Property Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .994

27

28

INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT). Before using the product, read this manual carefully and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT for correct use. Manuals for GT Works3 Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons

Manuals for GT Works3 The electronic manuals related to this product are installed together with the screen design software. If you need the printed manuals, consult your local sales office.

Manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT2000)

e-Manual refers to the Mitsubishi Electric FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated tool. e-Manual has the following features: Required information can be cross-searched in multiple manuals. Other manuals can be accessed from the links in the manual. Hardware specifications of each part can be found from the product figures. Pages that users often browse can be bookmarked. Sample programs can be copied to the engineering tool.

Screen design software-related manuals

Connection manuals

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GT Works3 Installation Instructions PDF

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual SH-081220ENG (1D7ML9)

PDF e-Manual

GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 SH-080862ENG (1D7MB2)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Version1 SH-081228ENG PDF e-Manual

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081197ENG (1D7MJ8)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081198ENG PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081199ENG PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals) For GT Works3 Version1

SH-081200ENG PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081867ENG (1D7MS9)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (2 Connection) for GT Works3 Version1 JY997D52301 PDF e-Manual

GT SoftGOT2000 manuals

GOT2000 series user's manuals

GOT SIMPLE series user's manuals

Manuals related to GT Works3 add-on projects

Manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT1000) Refer to the Help and manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT1000).

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual SH-081201ENG PDF e-Manual

MELSOFT GT OPC UA Client Operating Manual SH-082174ENG PDF

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) SH-081194ENG (1D7MJ5)

PDF, e-Manual

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) SH-081195ENG (1D7MJ6)

PDF, e-Manual

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor) SH-081196ENG (1D7MJ7)

PDF, e-Manual

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GOT SIMPLE Series User's Manual JY997D52901 PDF e-Manual

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GT Works3 Add-on License for GOT2000 Enhanced Drive Control (Servo) Project Data Manual (Fundamentals)

SH-082072ENG (1D7MV1)

PDF, e-Manual

GT Works3 Add-on License for GOT2000 Enhanced Drive Control (Servo) Project Data Manual (Screen Details)

SH-082074ENG (1D7MV3)

PDF, e-Manual

29

30

Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons The following shows the abbreviations, generic terms, and model icons used in this manual.

GOT GOT2000 series Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable GT27 GT27-X GT2715-X GT2715-XTBA, GT2715-XTBD

GT27-S GT2712-S GT2712-STBA, GT2712-STWA, GT2712-STBD, GT2712-STWD

GT2710-S GT2710-STBA, GT2710-STBD

GT2708-S GT2708-STBA, GT2708-STBD

GT27-V GT2710-V GT2710-VTBA, GT2710-VTWA, GT2710-VTBD, GT2710-VTWD

GT2708-V GT2708-VTBA, GT2708-VTBD

GT2705-V GT2705-VTBD

GT25 All GT25 models

GT25-W GT2512-WX GT2512-WXTBD, GT2512-WXTSD

GT2510-WX GT2510-WXTBD, GT2510-WXTSD

GT2507-W GT2507-WTBD, GT2507-WTSD

GT2507T-W GT2507T-WTSD

GT25-S GT2512-S GT2512-STBA, GT2512-STBD

GT2512F-S GT2512F-STNA, GT2512F-STND

GT25-V GT2510-V GT2510-VTBA, GT2510-VTWA, GT2510-VTBD, GT2510-VTWD

GT2510F-V GT2510F-VTNA, GT2510F-VTND

GT2508-V GT2508-VTBA, GT2508-VTWA, GT2508-VTBD, GT2508-VTWD

GT2508F-V GT2508F-VTNA, GT2508F-VTND

GT2505-V GT2505-VTBD

GT25HS-V Handy GOT

GT2506HS-V GT2506HS-VTBD

GT2505HS-V GT2505HS-VTBD

GT23 GT23-V GT2310-V GT2310-VTBA, GT2310-VTBD

GT2308-V GT2308-VTBA, GT2308-VTBD

GOT SIMPLE series

GOT1000 series, GOT900 series, and GOT800 series

GT21 All GT21 models

GT21-W GT2107-W GT2107-WTBD, GT2107-WTSD

GT21-Q GT2105-Q GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS

GT21-R GT2104-R GT2104-RTBD

GT21-P GT2104-P GT2104-PMBD

GT2104-PMBDS

GT2104-PMBDS2

GT2104-PMBLS

GT2103-P GT2103-PMBD

GT2103-PMBDS

GT2103-PMBDS2

GT2103-PMBLS

GT SoftGOT2000 GT SoftGOT2000 Version1

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable GS21 GS21-W-N GS2110-WTBD-N

GS2107-WTBD-N

GS21-W GS2110-WTBD GS2107-WTBD

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable GOT1000 Series GOT1000 Series

GOT900 Series GOT-A900 Series, GOT-F900 Series

GOT800 Series GOT-800 Series

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable

31

32

Communication unit

Option unit

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS

GT15-QBUS2 GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit GT25-J71GN13-T2

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13

Wireless LAN communication unit GT25-WLAN

Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M

Connection conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S

Field network adapter unit GT25-FNADP

Ethernet communication unit GT25-J71E71-100

RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Printer unit GT15-PRN

Video input unit GT27-V4-Z (A set of GT16M-V4-Z and GT27-IF1000)

RGB input unit GT27-R2 GT27-R2-Z (A set of GT16M-R2-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Video/RGB input unit GT27-V4R1-Z (A set of GT16M-V4R1-Z and GT27-IF1000)

RGB output unit GT27-ROUT GT27-ROUT-Z (A set of GT16M-ROUT-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Digital video output unit GT27-VHOUT

Multimedia unit GT27-MMR-Z (A set of GT16M-MMR-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Video signal conversion unit GT27-IF1000

External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT

SD card unit GT21-03SDCD

Option Abbreviations and generic terms Description SD card NZ1MEM-2GBSD

NZ1MEM-4GBSD NZ1MEM-8GBSD NZ1MEM-16GBSD L1MEM-2GBSD L1MEM-4GBSD

Battery GT11-50BAT GT15-BAT

Protective sheet GT27-15PSGC GT25-12WPSGC GT25-12PSGC GT25-10WPSGC GT25-10PSGC GT25-08PSGC GT21-07WPSGC GT25T-07WPSVC GT25-05PSGC GT25-05PSGC-2 GT21-05PSGC GT21-04RPSGC-UC GT21-03PSGC-UC GT21-04PSGC-UC GT27-15PSCC GT25-12WPSCC GT25-12PSCC GT25-10WPSCC GT25-10PSCC GT25-08PSCC GT25-05PSCC GT25-05PSCC-2 GT25-12PSCC-UC GT25-10PSCC-UC GT25-08PSCC-UC GT21-07WPSCC GT21-05PSCC GT21-04RPSCC-UC GT21-04PSCC-UC GT21-03PSCC-UC GT16H-60PSC GT14H-50PSC

Antibacterial/antiviral protective sheet GT25-12PSAC GT25-10PSAC GT25-08PSAC

Environmental protection sheet GT25F-12ESGS GT25F-10ESGS GT25F-08ESGS

Protective cover for oil GT20-15PCO GT20-12PCO GT20-10PCO GT20-08PCO GT21-12WPCO GT21-10WPCO GT21-07WPCO GT25T-07WPCO GT25-05PCO GT25-05PCO-2 GT05-50PCO GT21-04RPCO GT10-30PCO GT10-20PCO

USB environmental protection cover GT25-UCOV GT25-05UCOV GT21-WUCOV

33

34

Software Software related to GOT

Software related to iQ Works

Stand GT15-90STAND GT15-80STAND GT15-70STAND GT05-50STAND GT25-10WSTAND GT21-07WSTAND GT25T-07WSTAND

Attachment GT15-70ATT-98 GT15-70ATT-87 GT15-60ATT-97 GT15-60ATT-96 GT15-60ATT-87 GT15-60ATT-77 GT21-04RATT-40

Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S GT10-C10EXUSB-5S

Connector conversion box GT16H-CNB-42S GT16H-CNB-37S GT11H-CNB-37S

Emergency stop switch guard cover GT16H-60ESCOV GT14H-50ESCOV

Wall-mounting attachment GT14H-50ATT

Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT Works3 SW1DND-GTWK3-J, SW1DND-GTWK3-E, SW1DND-GTWK3-C

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen design software GT Designer3 for GOT2000 and GOT1000 series

GT Designer3 Screen design software for GOT2000 series included in GT Works3

GT Designer3(GOT2000)

GT Designer3(GOT1000) Screen design software for GOT1000 series included in GT Works3

Speech synthesis license GT Works Text to Speech License (SW1DND-GTVO-M)

Add-on license GT Works3 add-on license for GOT2000 enhanced drive control (servo) project data (SW1DND-GTSV-MZ)

GENESIS64 Advanced GENESIS64 server application (GEN64-APP)

GENESIS64 Basic SCADA GENESIS64 server application (GEN64-BASIC)

GENESIS64 Generic term of GENESIS64 Advanced and GENESIS64 Basic SCADA

GOT Mobile function license for GT SoftGOT2000

License required to use the GOT Mobile function with GT SoftGOT2000 (SGT2K-WEBSKEY-)

GT Simulator3 Screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT2000, GOT1000, and GOT900 series

GT SoftGOT2000 GOT2000 compatible HMI software GT SoftGOT2000

GT OPC UA Client MELSOFT GT OPC UA Client (SW1DNN-GTOUC-MD)

GT Converter2 Data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 and GOT900 series

GT Designer2 Classic Screen design software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series

GT Designer2 Screen design software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 and GOT900 series

DU/WIN Screen design software FX-PCS-DU/WIN for GOT-F900 series

Abbreviations and generic terms Description iQ Works iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works

MELSOFT Navigator Integrated development environment software included in SW DND-IQWK(iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works) ( represents a version.)

MELSOFT iQ AppPortal SWDND-IQAPL-M type integrated application anagement software ( represents a version.)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

Other software

License key (for GT SoftGOT2000)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description GX Works3 SW DND-GXW3-E (-EA, -EAZ) type programmable controller engineering software

( represents a version.)

GX Works2 SW DNC-GXW2-E (-EA, -EAZ) type programmable controller engineering software ( represents a version.)

Controller simulator GX Simulator3 Simulation function of GX Works3

GX Simulator2 Simulation function of GX Works2

GX Simulator SWD5C-LLT-E (-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software package (SW5D5C-LLT (-V) or later versions) ( represents a version.)

GX Developer SWD5C-GPPW-E (-EV)/SWD5F-GPPW (-V) type software package ( represents a version.)

GX LogViewer SWDNN-VIEWER-E type software package ( represents a version.)

MI Configurator Configuration and monitor tool for Mitsubishi Electric industrial computers (SWDNNMICONF-M) ( represents a version.)

PX Developer SWD5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control ( represents a version.)

MT Works2 Motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2(SWDNDMTW2-E) ( represents a version.)

MT Developer SWRNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series ( represents a version.)

CW Configurator Setting/monitoring tools for the C Controller module and MELSECWinCPU (SWDND-RCCPU-E) ( represents a version.)

MR Configurator2 SWDNC-MRC2-E type servo configuration software ( represents a version.)

MR Configurator MRZJW-SETUP type servo configuration software ( represents a version.)

FR Configurator2 Inverter setup software (SW DND-FRC2-E) ( represents a version.)

FR Configurator Inverter setup software (FR-SW-SETUP-WE) ( represents a version.)

NC Configurator2 CNC parameter setting support tool (FCSB1221)

NC Configurator CNC parameter setting support tool

FX Configurator-FP Parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U-20SSCH (SWD5CFXSSCE) ( represents a version.)

FX Configurator-EN-L FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)

FX Configurator-EN FX3U-ENET type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5C-FXENET-E)

RT ToolBox2 Robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)

RT ToolBox3 Robot program creation software (3F-14C-WINE)

MX Component MX Component Version(SWD5C-ACT-E, SWD5C-ACT-EA) ( represents a version.)

MX Sheet MX Sheet Version(SWD5C-SHEET-E, SWD5C-SHEET-EA) ( represents a version.)

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool CPU module logging configuration tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description License key GT27-SGTKEY-U

35

36

Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description IAI IAI Corporation

AZBIL Azbil Corporation

OMRON OMRON Corporation

KEYENCE KEYENCE CORPORATION

KOYO EI KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

JTEKT JTEKT CORPORATION

SHARP Sharp Corporation

SHINKO Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.

CHINO CHINO CORPORATION

TOSHIBA TOSHIBA CORPORATION

SHIBAURA MACHINE SHIBAURA MACHINE CO.,LTD.

PANASONIC Panasonic Corporation

PANASONIC IDS Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

HITACHI IES Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.

HITACHI Hitachi, Ltd.

HIRATA Hirata Corporation

FUJI FUJI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

MURATEC Muratec products manufactured by Murata Machinery, Ltd.

YASKAWA YASKAWA Electric Corporation

YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Electric Corporation

RKC RKC INSTRUMENT INC.

ALLEN-BRADLEY Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.

CLPA CC-Link Partner Association

GE GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc.

HMS HMS Industrial Networks

LS IS LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.

MITSUBISHI INDIA Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd.

ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.

SCHNEIDER Schneider Electric SA

SICK SICK AG

SIEMENS Siemens AG

SCHNEIDER EJH Schneider Electric Japan Holdings Ltd.

PLC Programmable controller manufactured by its respective company

Control equipment Control equipment manufactured by its respective company

Temperature controller Temperature controller manufactured by its respective company

Indicating controller Indicating controller manufactured by its respective company

Controller Controller manufactured by its respective company

TSN Switch CC-Link IE TSN Class B (Synchronized Realtime Communication) hub certified by CC-Link Partner Association

General-purpose Switch CC-Link IE TSN Class A (Realtime Communication) hub certified by CC-Link Partner Association

CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module Generic term for the following CC-Link IE TSN master/local modules and CC-Link IE TSN Plus master/local module RJ71GN11-T2 RJ71GN11-EIP FX5-CCLGN-MS

1

1 FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITOR

Only available to GT SoftGOT2000 (Multiple channels) for GT SoftGOT2000. Page 37 Each Function and Related Manuals Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function Page 40 Languages Available for Each Function

1.1 Each Function and Related Manuals The following lists other manuals relevant to each function.

Function Related manual Description System launcher GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the system launcher from the utility

Enabling or disabling the online module change

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the system launcher How to install a system application (extended function)

Device monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the device monitor from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the device monitor How to install a system application (extended function)

Sequence program monitor (Ladder) Sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) Sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder) Sequence program monitor (SFC)

GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the sequence program monitor from the utility

Configuring the sequence program monitor settings, including the ladder data save destination and automatically reading of a sequence program

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the sequence program monitor

How to install a system application (extended function)

Network monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the network monitor from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the network monitor How to install a system application (extended function)

Q Motion monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the Q motion monitor from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the Q motion monitor How to install a system application (extended function) How to write special data

Intelligent unit monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the intelligent module monitor from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the intelligent module monitor

How to install a system application (extended function) How to write special data

Servo amplifier monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the servo amplifier monitor from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the servo amplifier monitor

How to install a system application (extended function) How to write special data

Backup/restoration GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to display the backup/restoration screen from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to display the backup/restoration screen

Setting the backup data save destination, trigger backup, and others

How to install a system application (extended function)

LOG Viewer GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the log viewer from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the log viewer How to install a system application (extended function)

FX Ladder monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the FX ladder monitor from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the FX ladder monitor How to install a system application (extended function)

1 FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITOR 1.1 Each Function and Related Manuals 37

38

Q motion SFC monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the Q motion SFC monitor from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the Q motion SFC monitor

How to install a system application (extended function)

FX List editer GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the FX ladder monitor from the FX list editor

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the FX list editor How to install a system application (extended function)

R Motion monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the R motion monitor from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the R motion monitor How to install a system application (extended function) How to write special data

CNC monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the CNC monitor from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the CNC monitor How to install a system application (extended function)

CNC data I/O GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the CNC data I/O from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the CNC data I/O How to install a system application (extended function)

CNC machining program edit GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the CNC machining program edit from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the CNC machining program edit

How to install a system application (extended function)

CNC monitor 2 GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the CNC monitor 2 from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the CNC monitor 2 How to install a system application (extended function)

iQSS utility GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the iQSS utility from the utility Specifying a drive to save profile data

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the iQSS utility How to install a system application (extended function)

Drive recorder GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the drive recorder from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the drive recorder How to install a system application (extended function)

CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics

GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the CC-Link IE TSN/CC- Link IE Field Network diagnostics

How to install a system application (extended function)

Motion program editor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the motion program editor from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the motion program editor

How to install a system application (extended function)

Motion program I/O GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the motion program I/O from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the motion program I/O How to install a system application (extended function)

Servo amplifier graph GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the servo amplifier graph from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the servo amplifier graph How to install a system application (extended function)

R motion SFC monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the R motion SFC monitor from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the R motion SFC monitor

How to install a system application (extended function)

Vision sensor monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the vision sensor monitor from the utility

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the vision sensor monitor How to install a system application (extended function)

Function Related manual Description

1 FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITOR 1.1 Each Function and Related Manuals

1

1.2 System Applications (Extended Functions)

Required for Each Function The following shows system applications (extended functions) required for each function.

Function Required system application (extended function) System launcher [System Launcher]

Device monitor [Device monitor]

[GOT Platform Library]

Sequence program moniotr (Ladder) [Sequence Program Monitor(Ladder)]

[GOT Platform Library]

[GOT Function Expansion Library]

Sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) [Sequence Program Monitor(iQ-R Ladder)]

[GOT Platform Library]

[GOT Function Expansion Library]

[GOT Function Expansion Library (Additional/MELSEC iQ-R)]

Sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder) [Sequence Program Monitor(iQ-F Ladder)]

[GOT Platform Library]

[GOT Function Expansion Library]

[GOT Function Expansion Library (Additional/MELSEC iQ-F)]

Sequence program monitor (SFC) [Sequence Program Monitor(SFC)]

[GOT Platform Library]

[GOT Function Expansion Library]

Network monitor [Network monitor]

Q motion monitor [Q motion monitor]

Intelligent module monitor [Intelligent module monitor]

Servo amplifier monitor [Servo amplifier monitor]

Backup/restoration [Backup/Restoration]

MELSEC-L troubleshooting [MELSEC-L Troubleshooting Function]

Log viewer [Log Viewer]

FX ladder monitor [FX Ladder Monitor]

Q motion SFC monitor [Q Motion SFC Monitor]

[GOT Platform Library]

FX list editor [FX list editor]

R motion monitor [R motion monitor]

CNC monitor [CNC Monitor]

CNC data I/O [CNC Data I/O]

[GOT Platform Library]

CNC machining program edit [CNC Machining Program Edit]

[GOT Platform Library]

CNC monitor 2 [CNC Monitor 2]

[GOT Platform Library]

iQSS utility [iQSS Utility]

Drive recorder [Drive Recorder]

CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics [CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics]

Motion program editor [Motion Program Editor]

Motion program I/O [Motion Program Input/Output]

[GOT Platform Library]

Servo amplifier graph [Servo amplifier graph]

R motion SFC monitor [R Motion SFC Monitor]

[GOT Platform Library]

Vision sensor monitor [Vision sensor monitor]

1 FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITOR 1.2 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function 39

40

1.3 Languages Available for Each Function Languages available for each function are shown in the following table. :Displayed :Not displayed Eng.:Displayed in English

*1 For further information, refer to the following. Page 143 Switching languages of sequence programs (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only)

*2 The display language used for the monitor screen depends on the setting of the CNC parameter (#1043 lang). *3 The language used to display profile data depends on the language version of the data. *4 When data is read from a file, the [(At alarm occurrence)] screen displays the data in the same language as the file.

Function Japanese English Chinese (Simplified)

Chinese (Traditinal)

Korean

Utility function

System launcher

Device monitor

Sequence program monitor (Ladder) Sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) Sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder)

File name, Title, Comment, Note, Statement

Other than the above *1

Sequence program monitor (SFC)

Network monitor

Q motion monitor Eng. Eng. Eng.

Intelligent module montor Eng. Eng. Eng.

Servo amplifier monitor Eng. Eng. Eng.

Backup/restoration

Log viewer

FX ladder monitor

Q motion SFC monitor

FX list editor

R motion monitor Eng. Eng. Eng.

CNC monitor *2

CNC data I/O Eng. Eng.

CNC machining program edit Eng. Eng.

CNC monitor 2 *2 Eng. Eng.

iQSS utility *3

Drive recorder *4

CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics

Motion program editor

Motion program I/O Eng. Eng.

Servo amplifier graph

R motion SFC monitor

Vision sensor monitor

1 FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITOR 1.3 Languages Available for Each Function

2

2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER

Only available to GT SoftGOT2000 (Multiple channels) for GT SoftGOT2000. Page 41 Features Page 42 Specifications Page 45 Operations for Display Page 48 Operating Procedure

2.1 Features The system launcher enables the following functions for the devices connected to the GOT. Displaying the status of a module Starting the extended functions applicable to a module Replacing a module of a PLC while the PLC is on line (Online module change) Displaying the product information of a module. Outputting the product information of a module to a file.

2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.1 Features 41

42

2.2 Specifications Page 42 System configuration Page 44 Precautions

System configuration This section explains the system configuration of the system launcher. For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit, cable, and connection type, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1 GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual

Target controller

*1 The online module change is not available. *2 CRnD-700 and CR800-D do not support the system launcher.

Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types. : Available, : Unavailable

For the connection type between the GOT and each controller, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1 GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual

Controller MELSEC iQ-R series *1

QCPU (Q mode)

LCPU

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) *1

Motion CPU (Q series)

CNC C80

CNC C70

Robot controller *2

Function Connection type between the GOT and controller

Name Description Bus connect ion

Direct CPU connect ion (Serial)

Serial commu nication connect ion

Ethernet connecti on (using Ethernet port built in the CPU)

Ethernet connectio n (using Ethernet module)

MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/ 10 connection

CC-Link IE TSN connecti on

CC-Link IE Controll er connect ion, CC- Link IE Field connect ion

CC-Link connecti on

ID G4

System launcher

Displaying the status of modules

Starting extended functions

Online module change

2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.2 Specifications

2

Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following. Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function

System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the system launcher to the GOT. To use an extended function compatible with the system launcher, write the package data that contains the corresponding system application (extended function) to the GOT. For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required. For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable. For the devices whose operations have been validated by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation, refer to the following Technical Bulletin. List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT2000 Series and GOT SIMPLE Series (for Overseas) (GOT-A-0160)

Extended function compatible with the system launcher The following table shows the extended functions that can be started from the system launcher.

*1 The CPU number setting is not transferred. Only the channel of the connected controller is in its selected state.

Online module change To enable the online module change, configure the setting in [System Launcher] of [Ext. func. set] in the utility. Set [Online module change] to [Effective]. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Extended function Device monitor

Sequence program monitor (Ladder)

Sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder)

Sequence program monitor (SFC)

Network monitor

Q motion monitor

R motion monitor

Intelligent module monitor

Backup/restoration *1

Q motion SFC monitor

CNC monitor

CNC data I/O

CNC machining program edit

CNC monitor 2

iQSS utility

Drive recorder

CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics

System launcher (servo network)

Servo amplifier graph

R motion SFC monitor

2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.2 Specifications 43

44

Precautions

Display of the system configuration diagram The system configuration diagram has two types: the system configuration diagram for the system launcher and the one for the extended function. When you select a module supported by the system launcher, the system configuration diagram for the system launcher appears. When you select a module unsupported by the system launcher, the system configuration diagram for the extended function used appears if it is available. For the screen transition of the system configuration diagram for the extended function, refer to the extended function used. When the system application (extended function) for the system launcher is not installed on the GOT, even though you select a module supported by the system launcher, the system configuration diagram for the extended function used appears.

Precautions for online module change When you replace a module of a PLC while the PLC is on line, the target module stops its operation. Check that the operations of the PLC are not affected, and then replace the module. The following shows the applicable modules. QCPU(Q mode) Input module, Output module, Input/Output module, Analog input module, Analog output module, Temperature input module, Temperature control module, Loop control module, Pulse input module For the details of the online module change, refer to the following. Manual of the CPU or module used

When displaying with GT SoftGOT2000 In the case of GT SoftGOT2000, target screens in the following table are displayed according to the following conditions: The screens are displayed so that they fit with the GOT screen resolution and orientation set in GT Designer3. If the screens fit both in vertical display and horizontal display, they are displayed horizontally. Any screens other than the target screens are displayed in the same way as the GOT2000 series. The following shows the sizes of the target screens displayed with GT SoftGOT2000.

*1 If the GT SoftGOT2000 resolution set in GT Designer3 is higher than the resolution of the target screen, the target screen will be displayed at the center of the GT SoftGOT2000 screen. In that case, the margin around the target screen will be filled with black.

*2 This setting is available only when the SoftGOT-GOT link function is used.

Target screen*1

GT SoftGOT2000 resolution set in GT Designer3

Horizontal (X)

480 600 640 to 767 768 to 799 800 to 1023

1024 to 1279

1280 to 1920

[System configuration] screen

[Online module change] screen

Vertical (Y) 480 to 599 - - VGA (horizontal)

VGA (horizontal)

WVGA (horizontal)

WVGA (horizontal)

WVGA (horizontal)

600 to 767 VGA (vertical)*2

- VGA (horizontal)

VGA (horizontal)

SVGA (horizontal)

SVGA (horizontal)

SVGA (horizontal)

768 to 799 - - VGA (horizontal)

VGA (horizontal)

SVGA (horizontal)

XGA (horizontal)

XGA (horizontal)

800 to 1023 WVGA (vertical)*2

SVGA (vertical)*2

SVGA (vertical)

SVGA (vertical)

SVGA (horizontal)

XGA (horizontal)

WXGA (horizontal)

1024 to 1200 - - SVGA (vertical)

XGA (vertical)

XGA (vertical)

XGA (horizontal)

WXGA (horizontal)

1280 - - - - WXGA (vertical)*2

- -

2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.2 Specifications

2

2.3 Operations for Display This section explains how to display the system launcher screen after the GOT is turned on.

1. Turn on the GOT.

2. Display System Configuration screen. Perform one of the following operations. Starting from the special function switch (System launcher) set in the project For how to set special function switches, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Starting from the utility In the utility, touch [Monitor] [System launcher] from the main menu. For how to display the utility, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Starting from the context menu of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics Touch the device icon on the system configuration screen of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and touch [System Launcher] from the displayed context menu.

3. The [Select channel] window appears only at the first startup of the system launcher. Set the channel number of the PLC connected to the GOT. When the channel number is not set, touching the [] key closes the [Select channel] window and sets the channel number to [1].

4. The system configuration screen appears. To change the connection destination, touch the select channel key on the system configuration screen. Page 48 Operating Procedure

[Select channel] window

Select channel key

2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.3 Operations for Display 45

46

Starting the drive recorder by using the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics You can start the system launcher from the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics by selecting [System Launcher] from the context menu of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.

For the context menu of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, refer to the following. Page 790 Context menu

Touch the equipment icon. Select the system launcher.

Network configuration diagram (CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics) Context menu

[] key

The [System Configuration] screen appears.

2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.3 Operations for Display

2

Screen transition

*1 Only the system launcher (servo network) function is supported.

Utility Main Menu or

user-created monitor screen

System application (extended function)

[] key

[] key

[] key

At the second and subsequent startups, or at a startup when a connection destination is specified on the user-created monitor screen

[Select channel] window

Select channel key

[Legend] key

Select a module.

At the first startup (when no connection destination is specified on the user-created monitor screen)

Select [Online module change].

Select an extended function.

Extended function selection screen

[] key or [End] key

Select the system configuration diagram. Select the return key.*1

Select a connection destination.

[Cancel] key or return key

Start

[Save] key

[OK] key or [] key

[] key [Product info. list] key

2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.3 Operations for Display 47

48

2.4 Operating Procedure This section explains screen operations for the system launcher. The display screen of the system launcher differs depending on the GOT used. Page 48 System configuration screen Page 50 Online module change screen Page 52 [Product information list] window Page 53 [Create file] window

System configuration screen The following explains the structure of the system configuration screen and the function of the keys displayed on the screen after the system launcher is started.

1)Module status display Displays the information about [CPU No.], [Model], [Points], and [Start I/O] of the modules. When an RQ extension base unit is connected, the system configuration screen for MELSEC iQ-R series appears. Select a module to display the function list window. 2)Select channel key Displays the [Select channel] window. 3)[] key Exits the system configuration screen and returns the screen to a screen from which the system launcher was started. 4)Scroll key Scrolls the display up or down one stage. 5)Scroll bar Touch an area above or below the knob to scroll one page up or down. You can also scroll the page by sliding the knob. 6)[Total num of bases] The number of base units displayed in the system configuration diagram. When the monitoring target is the LCPU, [Total num of blocks] is displayed. 7)Message display If communication with the connected PLC cannot be established, [Communication error] appears.

9)

Function list

4)

2)1) 3)

8)

8)

4)

5)

6)

Knob

7)

10) 11) 12)

2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.4 Operating Procedure

2

8)Display list key (only for MELSEC iQ-R series) Displays the detailed information of each module on the target base unit. The following shows the display items. [Error No.] Displays an error number (hexadecimal) for the module with the error. [Network info. (port 1)] Displays the network information of port 1. [Network info. (port 2)] Displays the network information of port 2. [IP address (port 1)] Displays the IP address of port 1. [IP address (port 2)] Displays the IP address of port 2. [Module sync. status] Displays the synchronization status between the modules. In synchronization: [ON] In preparation: [OFF] With an error: [ERR] 9)[Legend] key Displays the [case] window.

10)[Product info. list] key Displays the [Product information list] window. For the details, refer to the following. Page 52 [Product information list] window 11)[Save] key Displays the [Create file] window. For the details, refer to the following. Page 53 [Create file] window

[] key Exits the [case] window and returns the screen to the system configuration screen. Legend display area

Lists the descriptions of the icons appearing on the system configuration diagram.

[] key

[] key

Legend display area

Legend display area

QCPU,LCPU

MELSEC iQ-R series

2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.4 Operating Procedure 49

50

12)CPU operation status (only for MELSEC iQ-R series) Displays the operation status of each CPU. Running: [RUN] Stopped: [STOP] Paused: [PAUSE] Being initialized: [INIT] Being reset: [-]

Online module change screen The following shows the procedure of the online module change.

1. Check the following items, and then touch the [Execute] key. The message [Exchange module selection completed] is displayed in [Status]. The lamp of [Execute module change] is on in [Operation]. The Y signal of the target module is off.

2. The confirmation dialog for the module change appears. Touch the [OK] key, and then check the following items. The message [Module replaceable] is displayed in [Status]. The lamp of [Check installation] is on in [Operation]. To cancel the operation and return the screen to the system configuration screen, touch the return key or [Cancel] key and then touch the [OK] button in a dialog appearing immediately after the cancellation.

3. Replace the target module, and then touch the [Execute] key.

4. When the module is correctly mounted, the following appears. The message [Module change completed] is displayed in [Status]. The lamp of [Restart module control] is on in [Operation]. To cancel the operation and return the screen to the system configuration screen, touch the return key or [Cancel] key and then touch the [OK] button in a dialog appearing immediately after the cancellation.

5. Touch the [Execute] key. When the module control is properly restarted, the screen returns to the system configuration screen.

2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.4 Operating Procedure

2

The following explains the structure of the [Online module change] screen and the function of the keys displayed on the screen.

1)[Module name] Displays the module name. 2)[Start I/O] Displays the module start I/O. 3)[Status] Displays the status of [Operation]. 4)[Operation] Displays the items executed in the actual operation. The lamp of the item to be executed is on. 5)[Status/guidance] Displays the procedure or precautions for [Operation]. 6)[Execute] key Executes the item whose lamp is on in [Operation]. 7)Return key, [Cancel] key Exits the [Online module change] screen and returns the screen to the system configuration screen. Cancels the operation during the module change and returns the screen to the system configuration screen.

1) 2)

3)

4)

5)

7)

6) 7)

2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.4 Operating Procedure 51

52

[Product information list] window Product information of the modules is listed. For MELSEC-Q or MELSEC-L series, the power supply module is not displayed. Information that cannot be acquired is displayed with [-].

1)Base unit display area Displays the selected base unit. 2)Select base unit key Switches the current base unit to the base unit in the upper or lower level. 3)[] key Closes the [Product information list] window, and returns the screen to the system configuration screen. 4)Level number Displays the level of the selected base unit out of all base units. 5)[slot] Displays the slot number of a module. 6)[Model name] Displays the model of a module. 7)[Ver] Displays the firmware version of a module. 8)[Production information] (MELSEC iQ-R series) Displays the production information of a module. For an RQ extension base unit, the first five digits of the serial number and the firmware version are displayed. 9)[Serial No.] (MELSEC-Q or MELSEC-L series) Displays the serial number of a module. 10)[Production number] (MELSEC-Q or MELSEC-L series) Displays the production number of a module. When CPU No. 1 is a Universal model QCPU with function version B01 or earlier, [-] is displayed.

1) 2) 3)

4)

5) 6) 9) 7) 10)

1) 2) 3)

4)

5) 6) 7) 8)

MELSEC iQ-R series MELSEC-Q or MELSEC-L series

2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.4 Operating Procedure

2

[Create file] window Product information of the modules is saved to a CSV file in the selected language in the selected drive. The file is saved in Unicode with BOM.

1)[] key Closes the [Create file] window, and returns the screen to the system configuration screen. 2)[Select drive] Select the drive to save the CSV file. The [Create file] window displays accessible drives only. A folder named SYSLAN is automatically created in the selected drive. 3)[Select language] Select the language for the CSV file. The following shows the selectable items. [Japanese] [English] [Chinese (Simplified)] [Chinese (Traditional)] [Korean] 4)[File path] Displays the path where a CSV file is to be saved. The drive in the path has been selected in [Select drive]. The file is automatically named as shown below. If a same-name file already exists, touch the [OK] key to display the [Checked] dialog.

5)[OK] key Creates a CSV file.

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Selected drive

SYSLAN

UnitList_CC-NN-SS_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.CSV

Year Month

Date Hour

Minute SecondChannel No.

Network No. Station No.

2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.4 Operating Procedure 53

54

MEMO

2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.4 Operating Procedure

3

3 DEVICE MONITOR

Page 55 Features Page 58 Specifications Page 76 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens Page 100 Entry Monitor Page 102 Batch Monitor Page 104 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters) Page 107 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory) Page 109 Error Messages and Corrective Actions For using the device monitor function on GT21, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

3.1 Features The device monitor function monitors and changes the devices of a PLC CPU or an intelligent module. Using this function, you can troubleshoot the system and streamline maintenance.

Monitoring devices on four dedicated screens The device monitor function comprises four monitors: entry monitor, batch monitor, T/C monitor, and BM monitor. You can monitor any device according to the application.

Entry monitor Monitors the devices registered by the user. Page 100 Entry Monitor

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.1 Features 55

56

Batch monitor Monitors the devices starting from the one specified by the user in a batch. Page 102 Batch Monitor

TC (timer, counter) monitor Monitors the current values, set values, contacts, and coils of timers, retentive timers, and counters of the PLC CPU in a batch. Page 104 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters)

BM (buffer memory) monitor Monitors the buffer memories of the intelligent module in a batch. Page 107 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.1 Features

3

Switching between the full mode and quad mode The full mode and the quad mode can be switched using the screen switching button as needed. The GOT in the full mode displays one monitor screen to display many devices at once. The GOT in the quad mode divides one screen into four windows to display four monitor screens. Page 80 Display format of the monitor screen ([One large screen], [4 screens])

Changing device values using the test operation The following values can be changed by the test operation. Current values of word devices and bit devices Current values and set values of timers, counters, and retentive timers Current values of buffer memories Page 88 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])

Switching the display format and displaying device comments The display format of device values can be switched among binary, decimal, and hexadecimal formats. Device comments can be displayed on the entry monitor, batch monitor, and TC monitor. Page 92 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])

Monitoring other stations You can monitor other stations in the data link system, network system, and CC-Link system containing the GOT (or GOT- connected station). For the details of the connection types that can be monitored, refer to the following. Page 58 System configuration

Switching the display languages and supporting multiple languages Monitor screens are displayed with the language set in the function setting of the utility.

The full mode and the quad mode can be switched.

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.1 Features 57

58

3.2 Specifications Page 58 System configuration Page 61 Devices that can be monitored Page 75 Access range Page 75 Precautions

System configuration This section describes the names of controllers and connection types that can be monitored using the device monitor function. For the details of the communication units cables used for each connection type, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1

Target controller

*1 The GOT cannot write data to devices in the QSCPU. (The test operation is not available.) *2 If the number in the DATE column on the rating plate is earlier than 9707B, set values of timers, counters, and retentive timers cannot be

monitored. *3 The BM monitor is not supported. *4 The T/C monitor is not supported. *5 When all the following conditions are satisfied, the CPU access the control system CPU.

The MELSEC redundant setting of the GOT is enabled. The operation mode of the PLC CPU is set to the redundant mode.

*6 The local monitor is not supported.

Controller Model RCPU *4*6 R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU,

R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU, R08PCPU *5, R16PCPU *5, R32PCPU *5, R120PCPU *5, R08PSFCPU *7, R16PSFCPU *7, R32PSFCPU *7, R120PSFCPU *7, R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, R120SFCPU

C controller module (MELSEC iQ-R series) *6 R12CCPU-V

MELSEC iQ-F *4*6 FX5U, FX5UC, FX5UJ, FX5S

QCPU (Q mode) Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q25PHCPU, Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU, Q00UJCPU, Q00UJCPU-S8, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU, Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDPVCPU

C Controller module (Q series) *6 Q12DCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-VG

QSCPU *1*6 QS001CPU

LCPU L02CPU, L06CPU, L26CPU, L26CPU-BT, L02CPU-P, L26CPU-PBT, L02SCPU

QnACPU *2*6 Q2ACPU, Q2ACPU-S1, Q3ACPU, Q4ACPU, Q4ARCPU

QnASCPU *2*6 Q2ASCPU, Q2SCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU, Q2ASHCPU-S1

FXCPU *3*6 FX0S, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC, FX3S

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) *6 R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU, R64MTCPU

Motion CPU (Q series) *6 Q172CPU *3, Q173CPU *3, Q172CPUN, Q173CPUN, Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU, Q172DCPU, Q172DCPU-S1, Q173DCPU, Q173DCPU-S1, Q172DSCPU, Q173DSCPU, Q170MCPU, Q170MCPU-S1, Q170MSCPU, Q170MSCPU-S1, MR-MQ100

Robot controller *6 CRnQ-700(Q172DRCPU), CRnD-700, CR800-R(R16RTCPU) *3*4, CR800-D *3*4, CR800-Q(Q172DSRCPU)

CNC C80 *6 R16NCCPU *3*4

MELDAS C70 *6 Q173NCCPU

MELDAS C6/C64 *6 FCA C6, FCA C64

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications

3

*7 Mount a SIL2 function module (R6PSFM) and a redundant function module (R6RFM) next to a SIL2 process CPU on the base unit.

Connection type The device monitor function can be used for the following connection types. : Available, : Not available

*1 The GOT is connected as an intelligent device station. *2 The GOT is connected to the CC-Link system via AJ65BT-G4-S3 or AJ65BT-R2N. *3 Not available for the following models.

Q172CPU, Q173CPU Q172CPUN, Q173CPUN Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU

*4 Only available for the following models. Q170MCPU(-S1) Q170MSCPU(-S1)

*5 Only available for FX3U(C). *6 Not available for FX5S.

Function Controller Direct CPU connection (Serial)

Serial communication connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

CC-Link IE Field Network connection

CC-Link connection

ID *1 G4 *2

Device monitor

RnCPU

CPU with built-in CC-Link IE (RnENCPU)

Process CPU (RnPCPU)

Safety CPU (RnSFCPU)

C controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

MELSEC iQ-F *6

QCPU (Q mode) Basic model QCPU

High Performance model QCPU

Process CPU

Redundant CPU (main base)

Redundant CPU (extension base)

Universal model QCPU

C Controller module (Q Series)

QSCPU

LCPU

QnACPU

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series)

Motion CPU (Q Series) *3 *4

CNC C80

CNC C70

MELDAS C6/C64

Robot controller CRnQ-700

CRnD-700

FXCPU *5

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 59

60

Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following. Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function

System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the device monitor to the GOT. To use an extended function compatible with the device monitor, write the package data that contains the applicable system application (extended function) to the GOT. For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required. For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Required hardware To display device comments on the device monitor, the data storage such as an SD card or USB memory is required. For the devices whose operations have been validated by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation, refer to the following Technical Bulletin. List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT2000 Series and GOT SIMPLE Series (for Overseas) (GOT-A-0160) Operation Check Results of Non-Mitsubishi SD Cards on GOT2000 Series Units (GOT-A-0065) For the display of device comments, refer to the following. Page 95 File switching for comment display ([Change comment])

Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable. For the devices whose operations have been validated by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation, refer to the following Technical Bulletin. List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT2000 Series and GOT SIMPLE Series (for Overseas) (GOT-A-0160)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications

3

Devices that can be monitored Devices that can be monitored differ depending on the monitor type and the controller used. Page 61 Entry monitor Page 65 Batch monitor Page 69 TC monitor Page 71 BM monitor Page 72 Test operation

Entry monitor The following lists the devices that can be monitored on the entry monitor.

PLC CPU Bit device : Available, : Not available

*1 When specifying a device, use a single string of BLnSm. (n: 0 to 319, m: 0 to 511)

*2 FX5UJCPU and FX5SCPU are not supported.

Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU

RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F

QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU

FXCPU

Input (X)

Output (Y)

Internal relay (M)

Latch relay (L)

Annunciator (F)

Link relay (B)

Special relay (SM)

Special relay for link (SB)

GOT bit register (GB)

Safety input relay (SAX)

Safety output relay (SAY)

Safety link relay (SAB)

Safety internal relay (SAM)

Safety Special relay (SASM)

SFC block (BL) *2

Step relay (block) (BLS) *1 *2

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 61

62

Word device : Available, : Not available

*1 Can be monitored only when the host station is monitored with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).

Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU

RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F

QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU

FXCPU

Data register (D)

Special data register (SD)

Link register (W)

Timer (current value) (TN)

Counter (current value) (CN)

Retentive timer (current value) (SN)

Long timer (current value) (LTN)

Long counter (current value) (LCN)

Long retentive timer (current value) (LSN)

Link special register (SW)

File register (R)

Extension file register (ZR)

Index register (Z)

Index register (32 bits) (LZ)

Link register (for writing) (Ww) *1 *1 *1 *1 *1

Link register (for reading) (Wr) *1 *1 *1 *1 *1

Motion device (#)

GOT data register (GD)

GOT special register (GS)

Safety timer (SAT)

Safety Counter (SAC)

Safety retentive timer (SAST)

Safety special relay (SASM)

Safety data register (SAD)

Safty special register (SAS)

Safety link register (SAW)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications

3

Other than PLC CPU Bit device : Available, : Not available

*1 The device can be monitored when Q24DHCCPU-V or Q24DHCCPU-VG is connected.

Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller

MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64

CRnQ- 700

CRnD -700

CR 800-R

CR 800-D

Input (X)

Output (Y)

Internal relay (M)

Latch relay (L)

Annunciator (F)

Link relay (B) *1

Special relay (SM)

Special relay for link (SB)

GOT bit register (GB)

Safety input relay (SAX)

Safety output relay (SAY)

Safety link relay (SAB)

Safety internal relay (SAM)

Safety Special relay (SASM)

SFC block (BL)

Step relay (block) (BLS)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 63

64

Word device : Available, : Not available

*1 The device can be monitored when Q24DHCCPU-V or Q24DHCCPU-VG is connected. *2 Can be monitored only when the host station is monitored with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).

Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller

MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64

CRnQ- 700

CRnD -700

CR 800-R

CR 800-D

Data register (D)

Special data register (SD)

Link register (W) *1

Timer (current value) (TN)

Counter (current value) (CN)

Retentive timer (current value) (SN)

Long timer (current value) (LTN)

Long counter (current value) (LCN)

Long retentive timer (current value) (LSN)

Link special register (SW)

File register (R)

Extension file register (ZR)

Index register (Z)

Index register (32 bits) (LZ)

Link register (for writing) (Ww)

*2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2

Link register (for reading) (Wr)

*2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2

Motion device (#)

GOT data register (GD)

GOT special register (GS)

Safety timer (SAT)

Safety Counter (SAC)

Safety retentive timer (SAST)

Safety special relay (SASM)

Safety data register (SAD)

Safty special register (SAS)

Safety link register (SAW)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications

3

Batch monitor The following lists the devices that can be monitored on the batch monitor.

PLC CPU Bit device : Available, : Not available

*1 When specifying a device, use a single string of BLnSm. (n: 0 to 319, m: 0 to 511)

*2 FX5UJCPU and FX5SCPU are not supported.

Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU

RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F

QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU

FXCPU

Input (X)

Output (Y)

Internal relay (M)

Latch relay (L)

Annunciator (F)

Link relay (B)

Special relay (SM)

Special relay for link (SB)

GOT bit register (GB)

Safety input (SAX)

Safety output (SAY)

Safety link relay (SAB)

Safety internal relay (SAM)

SFC block (BL) *2

Step relay (block) (BLS) *1 *2

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 65

66

Word device : Available, : Not available

*1 Can be monitored only when the host station is monitored with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).

Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU

RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F

QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU

FXCPU

Data register (D)

Special data register (SD)

Link register (W)

Timer (current value) (TN)

Counter (current value) (CN)

Retentive timer (current value) (SN)

Long timer (current value) (LTN)

Long counter (current value) (LCN)

Long retentive timer (current value) (LSN)

Link special register (SW)

File register (R)

Extension file register (ZR)

Index register (Z)

Index register (32 bits) (LZ)

Link register (for writing) (Ww) *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1

Link register (for reading) (Wr) *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1

Motion device (#)

GOT data register (GD)

GOT special register (GS)

Safety timer (SAT)

Safety counter (SAC)

Safety retentive timer (SAST)

Safety special relay (SASM)

Safety data register (SAD)

Safety special relay (SAS)

Safety link register (SAW)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications

3

Other than PLC CPU Bit device : Available, : Not available

*1 The device can be monitored when Q24DHCCPU-V or Q24DHCCPU-VG is connected.

Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller

MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64

CRnQ- 700

CRnD -700

CR 800-R

CR 800-D

Input (X)

Output (Y)

Internal relay (M)

Latch relay (L)

Annunciator (F)

Link relay (B) *1

Special relay (SM)

Special relay for link (SB)

GOT bit register (GB)

Safety input (SAX)

Safety output (SAY)

Safety link relay (SAB)

Safety internal relay (SAM)

SFC block (BL)

Step relay (block) (BLS)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 67

68

Word device : Available, : Not available

*1 The device can be monitored when Q24DHCCPU-V or Q24DHCCPU-VG is connected. *2 Can be monitored only when the host station is monitored with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).

Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller

MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64

CRnQ- 700

CRnD -700

CR 800-R

CR 800-D

Data register (D)

Special data register (SD)

Link register (W) *1

Timer (current value) (TN)

Counter (current value) (CN)

Retentive timer (current value) (SN)

Long timer (current value) (LTN)

Long counter (current value) (LCN)

Long retentive timer (current value) (LSN)

Link special register (SW)

File register (R)

Extension file register (ZR)

Index register (Z)

Index register (32 bits) (LZ)

Link register (for writing) (Ww)

*2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2

Link register (for reading) (Wr)

*2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2

Motion device (#)

GOT data register (GD)

GOT special register (GS)

Safety timer (SAT)

Safety counter (SAC)

Safety retentive timer (SAST)

Safety special relay (SASM)

Safety data register (SAD)

Safety special relay (SAS)

Safety link register (SAW)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications

3

TC monitor The following lists the devices that can be monitored on the TC monitor.

PLC CPU Bit device : Available, : Not available

Word device : Available, : Not available

Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU

RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F

QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU

FXCPU

Timer (contact) (TT)

Timer (coil) (TC)

Counter (contact) (CT)

Counter (coil) (CC)

Retentive timer (contact) (SS)

Retentive timer (coil) (SC)

Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU

RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F

QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU

FXCPU

Timer (current value) (TN)

Timer (set value)

Counter (current value) (CN)

Counter (set value)

Retentive timer (current value) (SN)

Timer (set value)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 69

70

Other than PLC CPU Bit device : Available, : Not available

Word device : Available, : Not available

Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller

MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64

CRnQ- 700

CRnD -700

CR 800-R

CR 800-D

Timer (contact) (TT)

Timer (coil) (TC)

Counter (contact) (CT)

Counter (coil) (CC)

Retentive timer (contact) (SS)

Retentive timer (coil) (SC)

Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller

MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64

CRnQ- 700

CRnD -700

CR 800-R

CR 800-D

Timer (current value) (TN)

Timer (set value)

Counter (current value) (CN)

Counter (set value)

Retentive timer (current value) (SN)

Timer (set value)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications

3

BM monitor The following lists the devices that can be monitored on the BM monitor.

PLC CPU Word device : Available, : Not available

*1 FX5SCPU is not supported.

Other than PLC CPU Word device : Available, : Not available

Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU

RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F

QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU

FXCPU

Buffer memory (intelligent function module) (BM)

*1

Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller

MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64

CRnQ- 700

CRnD -700

CR 800-R

CR 800-D

Buffer memory (intelligent function module) (BM)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 71

72

Test operation The following lists the devices for which the test operation can be performed.

PLC CPU Bit device : Writable, : Not writable

*1 When specifying a device, use a single string of BLnSm. (n: 0 to 319, m: 0 to 511)

*2 FX5UJCPU and FX5SCPU are not supported. Word device : Writable, : Not writable

*1 The current value of the index register (Z) cannot be changed. *2 Can be monitored only when the host station is monitored with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).

Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU

RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F

QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU

FXCPU

Input (X)

Output (Y)

Internal relay (M)

Latch relay (L)

Annunciator (F)

Link relay (B)

Special relay (SM)

Special relay for link (SB)

GOT bit register (GB)

SFC block (BL) *2

Step relay (block) (BLS) *1 *2

Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU

RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F

QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU

FXCPU

Data register (D)

Special data register (SD)

Link register (W)

Timer (current value) (TN)

Timer (set value)

Counter (current value) (CN)

Counter (set value)

Retentive timer (current value) (SN)

Timer (set value)

Long timer (current value) (LTN)

Long counter (current value) (LCN)

Long retentive timer (current value) (LSN)

Link special register (SW)

File register (R)

Extension file register (ZR)

Index register (Z) *1

Index register (32 bits) (LZ)

Buffer memory (intelligent function module) (BM)

Link register (for reading) (Wr) *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2

Motion device (#)

GOT data register (GD)

GOT special register (GS)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications

3

Other than PLC CPU Bit device : Writable, : Not writable

*1 The test operation can be performed when Q24DHCCPU-V or Q24DHCCPU-VG is connected.

Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller

MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64

CRnQ- 700

CRnD -700

CR 800-R

CR 800-D

Input (X)

Output (Y)

Internal relay (M)

Latch relay (L)

Annunciator (F)

Link relay (B) *1

Special relay (SM)

Special relay for link (SB)

GOT bit register (GB)

SFC block (BL)

Step relay (block) (BLS)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 73

74

Word device : Writable, : Not writable

*1 The test operation can be performed when Q24DHCCPU-V or Q24DHCCPU-VG is connected. *2 Can be monitored only when the host station is monitored with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).

Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller

MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series MELSEC iQ-R series

Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64

CRnQ- 700

CRnD -700

CR 800-R

CR 800-D

Data register (D)

Special data register (SD)

Link register (W) *1

Timer (current value) (TN)

Timer (set value)

Counter (current value) (CN)

Counter (set value)

Retentive timer (current value) (SN)

Timer (set value)

Link special register (SW)

File register (R)

Extension file register (ZR)

Index register (Z)

Index register (32 bits) (LZ)

Buffer memory (intelligent function module) (BM)

Link register (for reading) (Wr)

*2 *2 *2 *2

Motion device (#)

GOT data register (GD)

GOT special register (GS)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications

3

Access range When the GOT is connected to the remote I/O station in the MELSECNET/H network system, only the master station can be monitored. The access range other than the above is the same as the one for when the GOT is connected with a controller. For details of the access range, refer to the following.

Precautions

Monitoring word devices by 32 bits When word devices are monitored by 32 bits (two words), those with 32 bits of data remaining are monitored. Devices with 16 bits (one-word) of data remaining are not monitored. If an odd number is specified for the first monitor device number, the last device number of the specified controller will not be displayed.

Changing the set values of timers and counters of the QnACPU and displaying device comments For only QnACPUs whose number in the DATE column on the rating plate is [9707B] or later, the set values of timers (T) and counters (C) can be changed and device comments can be displayed.

Monitoring local devices using multiple software When monitoring local devices, do not monitor the devices of the same PLC CPU simultaneously using multiple software (including GT Designer3 and GX Works2). Otherwise the local devices cannot be monitored properly.

D11129 D11130 D11131 D11132 D11133 D11134 D11135 (Device name)

Unit of the monitor display Nothing is displayed.

PROGRAMMBLE CONTROLLER

DATE 9707 B

Manufacture year and month Function version

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 75

76

3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens This section describes the operations that are common to the monitor screens. Page 76 Displaying the monitor screen Page 79 Names of each section of monitor screen Page 80 Display format of the monitor screen ([One large screen], [4 screens]) Page 84 Entering devices ([Register]) Page 86 Deleting a device ([Delete]) Page 87 Deleting devices at a time ([Delete all]) Page 88 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test]) Page 92 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout]) Page 93 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor]) Page 95 File switching for comment display ([Change comment]) Page 98 Screen transition (common operation)

Displaying the monitor screen This section describes the flow until the device monitor screen is displayed after the device monitor (system application (Extended function)) is installed in the GOT. The display method of the device monitor screen differs between for the first time and later.

Displaying the device monitor screen for the first time Follow the procedure described below to display the device monitor screen.

1. Start the device monitor. The following two methods are provided for starting the device monitor. Using the special function switch (device monitor) set for the project Touch the special function switch (device monitor) placed on the monitor screen. For the setting method of the special function switch, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual If the project has not been written into the GOT yet, start the device monitor from the Utility. Starting the device monitor from the utility Display the utility screen and select the [Monitor] tab and [Device monitor]. For the display method of the utility, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

2. The communication setting window appears. Select the connection destination and communication driver of the controller to be monitored. Page 82 Communication setting dialog

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens

3

3. The [Device monitor] window appears.

Displaying the device monitor screen for the second time and later Follow the procedure described below to display the device monitor screen.

1. Start the device monitor. The following three methods are provided for starting the device monitor. Using the special function switch (device monitor) set for the project Touch the special function switch (device monitor) placed on the monitor screen. For the setting method of the special function switch, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual If the project has not been written into the GOT yet, start the device monitor from the Utility. Starting the device monitor from the utility Display the utility screen and select the [Monitor] tab and [Device Monitor]. For the display method of the utility, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Touching [Device monitor] on the [MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen When [MELSEC-L troubleshooting] is used, touch the [Device monitor] button. Page 467 MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING

2. The screen display depends on how the device monitor is started. When the device monitor is started using the special function switch (device monitor) for which [Specify the destination to

connect the screen of Device Monitor] is set The device monitor screen of the specified controller is displayed. When the device monitor is started using the special function switch (device monitor) for which [Specify the destination to

connect the screen of Device Monitor] is not set or from the utility screen The [History] dialog appears. Select the monitor history to be recovered and touch the [OK] key.

If you want to change the monitor target, touch the [Cancel] button. The communication setting dialog appears. Select the connection destination and communication driver of the controller to be monitored. Page 82 Communication setting dialog

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 77

78

3. The [Device monitor] screen appears.

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens

3

Names of each section of monitor screen

1)Monitor category display Displays a monitor category of the monitor screen that is currently displayed. 2)Monitor category change key Use this button to select a monitor category. Select from [Selected], [Series], [TC monitor], and [BM monitor]. 3)Screen switch key Switches the screen display between the full screen display and the quad screen display. 4)[Exit] key Exits the device monitor. 5)Monitor target display Displays the channel No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitor target. 6)Monitor device display area Displays the monitor device display area. 7)Scroll key Scrolls the monitor device display up and down. 8)Message display Displays error messages. 9)Sub menu key Use this key to register a device, execute test operation, or switch the display format on each monitor screen. Keys to be displayed vary depending on the monitor category.

1) 2)

6)

3) 4)

8) 9)

5)

7)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 79

80

Display format of the monitor screen ([One large screen], [4 screens]) In the device monitor, the screen display format can be switched between the full mode and the quad mode.

How to switch the display format To switch the display format from the full mode to the quad mode, touch the [4 screens] key.

To switch the display format from the quad mode to the full mode, touch the [One large screen] key.

[4 screens] button

[One large screen] button

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens

3

Destination path setting ([Connect])

Setting procedure for the destination path 1. Touch the [Connect] key on a device monitor screen.

2. The communication setting dialog appears. Set the destination path with referring to the following. Page 82 Communication setting dialog

[Connect] key

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 81

82

Communication setting dialog Configure the communication setting with the monitor target when starting monitor in this dialog.

Screen display

1)CH No. input area Set the CH No. for the target controller. The setting range is [1] to [4]. 2)Network No. input area Set the network No. for the target controller. The setting range differs depending on the connection type. Bus connection, direct CPU connection (serial), serial communication connection: [0] Ethernet connection: [1] to [239] MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: [0] (host loop), [1] to [255] (specified loop) CC-Link IE Controller Network connection: [1] to [239] CC-Link IE Field Network: [1] to [239] CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: [0] 3)Station No. input area Set the station No. of the target controller. When the station No. is set to the host station (FF), set the network No. to 0. The setting range differs depending on the connection type. Bus connection, direct CPU connection (serial), serial communication connection: [FF] (host station) Ethernet connection: [1] to [64] MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: [0] (control station), [1] to [64] (normal station) CC-Link IE Controller Network connection: [1] to [120] CC-Link IE Field Network connection: [0] (master station), [1] to [120] (local station) CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: [0] (master station), [1] to [64] (local station) 4)CPU No. input area Set the CPU No. of the multiple CPUs. This setting can be configured only the multiple CPUs are monitored. The setting range is [1] to [4]. 5)CH No. selection key Select the CH No. for connecting the monitor target. 6)Keys Keys for operations in the communication setting window are displayed.

5) 6)

3)

2)1) 2)

When the CH No. is input When the network No., station No., and CPU No. are input

4)

1)

3) 4)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens

3

Key functions

1)CH No. selection key Select the CH No. for connecting the monitor target. 2)[] key Closes the communication setting window. When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is not set, the communication setting window does not close. 3)Input area move key Moves the cursor among the input areas. 4)[Enter] key Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No. input area. When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station No. are completed, the communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears. 5)[Del] key Deletes an input value or character. 6)[AC] key Deletes all the input values and characters.

3)

2)

1)

4) 5) 6)

2)

3)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 83

84

Entering devices ([Register]) Enter devices to be monitored for all monitor categories.

Entering procedure for the monitor device The entry monitor is taken here as an example to describe the entry procedure for the monitor device.

1. Display the window for entering the device by either of following operations in each monitor. Touching the [Register] key Touching the monitor device display area When using other than the entry monitor, the window for entering the device is displayed only when no device is entered. When using the entry monitor, the window for entering the device is displayed even when a device is entered.

2. The window for entering the device appears. Set the destination with referring to the following. Page 85 Window for entering the device

3. When a password is not set for a sequence program, touch the [ENTER] key to enter the specified device. When a password is set for the sequence program, the dialog for canceling the password appears when the [ENTER] is touched. Inputting the correct password enters the specified device.

[Register] button

Monitor device display area

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens

3

4. When using the entry monitor, the window for entering the device is displayed successively. After entering the device, close the dialog with the [] key.

Window for entering the device The display contents of the window for entering the device differ depending on the monitor category.

1)Device display area Set a device to be entered when using the entry monitor, batch monitor, and TC monitor. 2)Memory address display area Set the memory address to be entered when using the BM monitor. 3)Input keys for device and memory address Use these keys to input a device or a memory address. 4)[] key Closes the window for entering the device. 5)Character type switch key Switches the character type of the key. [a-z] key: Switches the character type to alphabetic characters (lowercase). [A-Z] key: Switches the character type to alphabetic characters (uppercase). [Sign] key: Switches the character type to symbol. 6)Input area move key Moves the cursor among the input areas. Use this key only when using the BM monitor. 7)[Enter] key Enters the device input in the device display area or the memory address area. 8)[Del] key Deletes an input value or character. 9)[AC] key Deletes all the input values and characters.

Entry device

[x] key

Entry monitor, batch monitor, and TC monitor BM monitor

3) 3)

9)

6)

5)

9)8) 7) 7)

4) 4)

8)

1) 2)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 85

86

Deleting a device ([Delete]) Delete a device entered in the entry monitor.

How to delete a device 1. Touch a device to be deleted in the entry monitor.

2. Touch the [Delete] key.

3. The confirmation dialog appears. Touch the [OK] key to delete the selected device.

Touch a device to be deleted.

1.

2. Touch the [Delete] key.

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens

3

Deleting devices at a time ([Delete all]) Delete all the registered devices entered in the entry monitor at a time.

How to delete devices at a time 1. Touch the [Delete all] key in the entry monitor.

2. The confirmation dialog appears. Touch the [OK] key to delete all the selected devices.

Touch the [Delete all] key.

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 87

88

Test operation for the monitor device ([Test]) Test devices.

Operating procedure of the test This subsection takes a test operation of the D100 device as an example to describe the test operation procedure.

1. Touch the [Test] key in each monitor.

2. The confirmation dialog appears. Touch the [Yes] key to switch the mode to the test mode.

3. When switching the device value display format, touch the corresponding device value display format.

Before performing the quick test operations of the system monitor function (such as turning ON or OFF bit device, changing the word device current value, changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter, and changing the buffer memory current value), read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method. During quick test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system. False output or malfunction can cause an accident.

WARNING

[Test] key

Display format of the device value

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens

3

4. Touch a device targeted to the test operation.

5. A dialog for setting the device value according to the device display format appears. Set the device value with referring to the following. After setting the device value, touch the [ENTER] key. Page 90 Dialogs for setting the device value

6. The set value is reflected in the device.

The device to be tested

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 89

90

Ending the test mode To end the test mode, touch the [Test] key.

Dialogs for setting the device value The display contents of the dialogs for setting the device value differ depending on the device display format.

1)Device value display area Set the device value to be input. 2)Device value input key Use this key to input the device value. 3)[] key Closes the window for entering the device. 4)[DEX/HEX] key Switches the key type between the decimal and hexadecimal. 5)[FIX/EXP] key Switches the display format of the device value display area between the exponential representation (EXP) and the floating point representation (FIX). 6)[+/-] key Switches positive and negative of the input value. 7)[Enter] key Determines the device input area input in the device value display area. 8)[Del] key Deletes an input value or character. 9)[AC] key Deletes all the input values and characters.

[Test] key

For decimal number For binary or hexadecimal number For real number

2)

3)

2) 2)

3) 3)

4) 4) 5)

6) 6)7) 7) 7)8) 8) 8) 9)9)9)

1) 1)1)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens

3

Display format dialog

1)[Data size] Represents the data formats of the device. The following shows the selectable items. [16bit(W)] [32bit(D)] [64bit(L)] 2)[Data type] Represents the displayable display formats for the device value. The following shows the selectable items. [Signed decimal(K)] [Unsigned decimal(K+)] [Hexadecimal(HEX)] [Binary(BIN)] [Floating(EXP)] [Fixed(FIX)] 3)[Cancel] key Closes the display format dialog without reflecting the settings. 4)[OK] key Closes the display format dialog after reflecting the settings.

1)

2)

3)

4)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 91

92

Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout]) Switch the displayed number of device columns and display or non-display of the comments.

Procedure for switching the display The entry monitor is taken here as an example to describe the switch procedure for the display.

1. Touch the [Layout] key in the entry monitor.

2. The display item dialog appears. Set the display format and touch the [OK] key.

1)[Number of columns] Represents the number of the columns of the devices. 2)[Display comments] Switches whether to display or hide the device comments. 3)[Cancel] key Closes the display item dialog without reflecting the settings. 4)[OK] key Closes the display item dialog after reflecting the settings.

3. The display items are switched.

[Layout] key

1)

2)

3)

4)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens

3

Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor]) Monitor local devices.

Scan time while the GOT is using the local device monitor When the GOT is using the local device monitor, the scan time for the PLC increases.

Monitoring procedure of local devices The entry monitor is taken here as an example to describe the switch procedure for the display.

1. Touch the [Local monitor] key in each monitor.

2. The program list dialog appears. Select the target file for the local device monitor and touch the [Cancel] key.

1)Program file list Represents the program file list of the local device monitor target. A file can be selected by touching the file name. 2)[Cancel] key Closes the program list dialog without starting the local device monitor. 3)[OK] key Starts the local device monitor of the selected program.

[Local monitor] key

1)

2)

3)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 93

94

3. The confirmation dialog appears. Touching the [OK] key starts the local device monitor. Touching the [Cancel] key cancels the local device monitor.

Ending the local device monitor To end the local device monitor, touch the [Local monitor] key.

[Local monitor] key

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens

3

File switching for comment display ([Change comment]) The comment file to be displayed can be switched. This function cannot be used with the BM monitor.

Comment files which can be displayed when connected to the RCPU, MELSEC iQ-F, Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series), robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R series), or CNC C80 The device comments can be displayed on monitor screens by storing comment files into the data storage using the GX Works3 function of writing data to a memory card.

Comment file storage destination Comment files for all the controllers or specified controllers in the SEQCMNT folder can be used for the device monitor. Comment files for all the controllers can be commonly used for all the connected controllers. Comment files for specified controllers can be used when a CPU having the channel number, network number, station number, and CPU number of the folders storing the comment files is connected. The SEQDAT folder stores temporary files used for the device monitor. (User access is prohibited.)

Precautions for comment files The file extension of comment files is ".DCM". One-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used in a comment file name. The number of characters used for a comment file name excluding the extension is within 60 for comment files for all the

controllers and 38 for comment files for specified controllers. Only comment files output from FX5CPU projects can be used for the FX5CPU. Comment files output from any project can be used for the RCPU and CNC C80.

GX Works3

SEQCMNT

SEQDAT (user access prohibited)

CHxx: "xx" indicates a channel No. (01 to 04)

NETxxx: "xxx" indicates a network No. (000 to 239)

STxxx: "xxx" indicates a station number. (000 to 120, 255 (host station))

CPUxx: "xx" indicates a CPU No. (00 to 04)

Comment files are output to the memory card by the write function of GX Works3.

xxxxxxxx.DCM

xxxxxxxx.DCM

Comment files for all the controllers

xxxxxxxx.DCM

xxxxxxxx.DCM

Comment files for specified controllers

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 95

96

Comment files which can be displayed when connected to a device other than the RCPU, MELSEC iQ-F, Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series), robot controller (MELSEC iQ- R series), or CNC C80 Comment file types With the device monitor, comment files used for the sequence program monitor (Ladder) can be displayed. The following lists the types of comment file that can be displayed. Common comment files Comment files of the monitored program (when the local device monitor or T/C monitor is used) All comment files stored in the data storage connected to the GOT (when the local device monitor or T/C monitor is not

used) Comment files specified by the parameter of the PLC (when a QCPU, LCPU, or QnACPU is connected) Comment files specified by [Comment File Used in a Command] of the PC parameter in GX Works2 or GX Developer

Display of comment files in a GX Developer-format project Comment files in a GX Developer-format project also can be used for displaying device comments. In this case, store the comment files into the data storage as shown below.

Project folder of GX Developer

Resources

Others

xxxxxxxx.WCD

xxxxxxxx.WCD

Comment files

SEQCMNT

CHxx: "xx" indicates a channel No. (01 to 04)

NETxxx: "xxx" indicates a network No. (000 to 239) STxxx: "xxx" indicates a station number. (000 to 120, 255 (host station))

CPUxx: "xx" indicates a CPU No. (00 to 04)

SJIS

ASCII

GB

Big5

KS

Store each file into the folder whose name and the character code of the file to be stored correspond.

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens

3

Procedure for switching The entry monitor is taken here as an example to describe the procedure for switching comment files.

1. Touch the [Comment] key.

2. The comment file list dialog appears. Select the comment file to display and touch the [Change] key.

1)[Comment list] Lists the comment files displayed with the device monitor. A file can be selected by touching the file name. 2)[Cancel] key Closes the comment file list dialog. 3)[OK] key Closes the comment file list dialog and displays the selected comment file. When four screens are displayed and a comment file is set for one of the four screens, the comment file is also set for other screens connected to the same monitor target and no comment file is set for.

3. The comment file on display is switched.

[Change comment] key

1)

2)

3)

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 97

98

Screen transition (common operation) Starting the device monitor from the special function switch (device monitor)

Touch the special function switch (device monitor) on the monitor screen.

1.Display the utility.1.

2. Touch the [Devie monitor] in the [Monitor] tab.

First-time startup From the second-time startup

Touch the [Device monitor] on the MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen.

1.

Starting the device monitor from the MELSEC-L troubleshooting

Set the communication

path in the communication

setting dialog.

In the monitor history list, select the past monitor entry to use.[Cancel]

[OK]

The device monitor starts. (Example. Entry monitor)

[One large screen]

[4 screens]

[TC Monitor]

[Series]

[BM Monitor]

[End] Screens that started the device monitor Utility screen User-created screen MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen

Program list *1

[ENTER]

Display format

[Connect]

[Local monitor]

[Change comment]

[Layout][Register]

Device entry

Comment file list

Display items

Program list

Communication setting

Display format

*1

*1

*1

Starting the device monitor from the utility

*2

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens

3

*1 When a password or keyword is set for the controller, the password entry dialog appears. *2 When [Specify the destination to connect the screen of Device Monitor] of the special function switch (device monitor) has been set, the

device monitor screen of the specified controller is displayed.

Starting the function by using the special function switch (System launcher) You can start the device monitor from a user-created screen by selecting the connection destination with a special function switch (System launcher).

When the system launcher does not support the connection destination When the system launcher does not support the set connection destination, a dialog appears at the startup. For the details of the system launcher function, refer to the following. Page 41 SYSTEM LAUNCHER

The device monitor is started. (Example: Entry monitor)

Start the system launcher. Select the target function.

User-created screen having a special function switch (System Launcher) placed System configuration screen

[] key

[End] key

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 99

10

3.4 Entry Monitor The entry monitor is a function that registers the devices to monitor beforehand and monitors only the registered devices.

Screen display and the key function

1)Monitor category display Displays a monitor category of the monitor screen that is currently displayed. 2)Monitor category change key Use this button to select a monitor category. Select from [Series], [TC monitor], and [BM monitor]. 3)Screen switching key ([4 screens], [One large screen]) Switches the screen display between the full screen display and the quad screen display. 4)[Exit] key Exits the device monitor. 5)Monitor target display Displays the channel No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitor target. 6)Monitor device display area Displays the monitor device display area.

Item Description Device name Displays the device name of the monitor device.

Device number Displays the device number of the monitor device.

Device comment Displays the device comment set for the monitor device.

1)

6)

5)

7)

2)

3) 4)

10)9)8) 14)13)12)11) 15)

Device name

Bit device

Device comment

Device number Device value

Device name

Word device

Device comment

Device value Device value

Display format

0 3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.4 Entry Monitor

3

7)Message display Displays error messages. 8)[Register] key Registers devices. Displays the device entry window when touched. Page 85 Window for entering the device 9)[Delete] key Deletes a selected registered device. Page 86 Deleting a device ([Delete]) 10)[Delete all] key Deletes all the registered devices. Page 87 Deleting devices at a time ([Delete all]) 11)[Test] key Carries out a test operation. Page 88 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test]) 12)[Layout] key Changes the display of items. The display of the following items can be changed. Number of the columns of the devices to be displayed Comments (can be switched between displaying and hiding) Page 92 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout]) 13)[Change comment] key The comment file to be displayed can be switched. Touch the key to display the comment file list dialog. Page 95 File switching for comment display ([Change comment]) 14)[Local monitor] key Starts or ends the local device monitor. Page 93 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor]) 15)[Connect] key Switches the monitor target for the device monitor. Touch the key to display the communication setting dialog. Page 82 Communication setting dialog

Device value Displays the device value of the monitor device. If a bit device is the target, the status is indicated as shown below. : Bit ON : Bit OFF

Display format Represents the display format of the device value. The character on the left represents the data range of the device. [W]: Word (16 bits) [D]: Double-word (32 bits) [L]: Longword (64 bits)

The character string on the right represents the display format of the device value. [K]: Signed decimal [K+]: Unsigned decimal [HEX]: Hexadecimal [BIN]: Binary [EXP]: Exponential notation [FIT]: Decimal representation

The display format can be changed when touched.

Item Description

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.4 Entry Monitor 101

10

3.5 Batch Monitor The device monitor is a function that specifies the start device in a range of devices and monitors the start and the following successive devices in a batch.

Screen display and the key function

1)Monitor category display Displays a monitor category of the monitor screen that is currently displayed. 2)Monitor category change key Use this button to select a monitor category. Select from [Selected], [TC monitor], and [BM monitor]. 3)Screen switching key ([4 screens], [One large screen]) Switches the screen display between the full screen display and the quad screen display. 4)[Exit] key Exits the device monitor. 5)Monitor target display Displays the channel No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitor target. 6)Monitor device display area Displays the monitor device display area.

Item Description [Previous Device] Displays the devices preceding those on display. (Displays another part of the range.)

[Next Device] Displays the devices following those on display. (Displays another part of the range.)

Device name Displays the device name of the monitor device. If a bit device is the target, the status is indicated as shown below. : Bit ON : Bit OFF

1)

6)

5)

7)

2)

3) 4)

10)9)8) 13)12)11)

Device name

Bit device

Device comment

Device number Device value

Device name

Word device

Device comment

Device number Device value

Display format

2 3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.5 Batch Monitor

3

7)Message display Displays error messages. 8)[Register] key Registers the start device of monitor targets. Displays the device entry window when touched. Page 85 Window for entering the device 9)[test] key Carries out a test operation. Page 88 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test]) 10)[Layout] key Changes the display of items. The display of the following items can be changed. Number of the columns of the devices to be displayed Comments (can be switched between displaying and hiding) Page 92 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout]) 11)[Change comment] key The comment file to be displayed can be switched. Touch the key to display the comment file list dialog. Page 95 File switching for comment display ([Change comment]) 12)[Local monitor] key Starts or ends the local device monitor. Page 93 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor]) 13)[Connect] key Switches the monitor target for the device monitor. Touch the key to display the communication setting dialog. Page 82 Communication setting dialog

Device number Displays the device number of the monitor device.

Device comment Displays the device comment set for the monitor device.

Device value Displays the device value of the monitor device.

Display format Represents the display format of the device value. The display format can be changed when touched. The character on the left represents the data range of the device. [W]: Word (16 bits) [D]: Double-word (32 bits) [L]: Longword (64 bits)

The character string on the right represents the display format of the device value. [K]: Signed decimal [K+]: Unsigned decimal [HEX]: Hexadecimal [BIN]: Binary [EXP]: Exponential notation [FIT]: Decimal representation

Item Description

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.5 Batch Monitor 103

10

3.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters) The TC monitor is a function that monitors only timers (T) and counters (C). At the start of the TC monitor, the program list dialog appears. Select the target program for monitoring and start monitoring.

1)Program file list Lists program files that can be the targets for the TC monitor. A file can be selected by touching the file name. 2)[Cancel] key Closes the program list dialog without starting the local device monitor. 3)[OK] key Starts the local device monitor of the selected program.

Screen display and the key function

1)Monitor category display Displays a monitor category of the monitor screen that is currently displayed. 2)Monitor category change key Use this button to select a monitor category. Select from [Selected], [Series], and [BM monitor]. 3)Screen switching key ([4 screen], [One large screen]) Switches the screen display between the full screen display and the quad screen display. 4)[Exit] key Exits the device monitor.

1)

2)

3)

1)

6)

5)

7)

2)

3) 4)

10)9)8) 14)13)12)11)

4 3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters)

3

5)Monitor target display Displays the channel No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitor target. 6)Monitor device display area Displays the monitor device display area.

Item Description Device name Displays the device name of the monitor device.

Device number Displays the device number of the monitor device.

Device comment Displays the device comment set for the monitor device.

Device value (current value) Displays the current value of the monitor device.

Device value (set value) Displays the set value of the monitor device.

Display format Represents the display format of the device value. The character on the left represents the data range of the device. [W]: Word (16 bits)

The character string on the right represents the display format of the device value. [K]: Signed decimal [HEX]: Hexadecimal

The display format can be changed when touched.

Contact, coil display Indicates the status of the contact or coil.

Device name Device comment

Device number

Device value (current value) Device value (set value) Display format

Contact, coil display

: Bit ON : Bit OFF Contact

Coil : Bit ON : Bit OFF

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters) 105

10

7)Message display Displays error messages. 8)[Register] key Registers devices. Displays the device entry window when touched. Page 85 Window for entering the device 9)[Test] key Carries out a test operation. Page 88 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test]) 10)[Layout] key Changes the display of items. The display of the following items can be changed. Number of the columns of the devices to be displayed Comments (can be switched between displaying and hiding) Page 92 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout]) 11)[Change comment] key The comment file to be displayed can be switched. Touch the key to display the comment file list dialog. Page 95 File switching for comment display ([Change comment]) 12)[Local monitor] key Starts or ends the local device monitor. Page 93 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor]) 13)[Change target] key Changes the program to be monitored. 14)[Connect] key Switches the monitor target for the device monitor. Touch the key to display the communication setting dialog. Page 82 Communication setting dialog

6 3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters)

3

3.7 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory) The BM monitor is a function that monitors the buffer memory of special function modules.

Screen display and the key function

1)Monitor category display Displays a monitor category of the monitor screen that is currently displayed. 2)Monitor category change key Use this button to select a monitor category. Select from [Selected], [Series], and [TC monitor]. 3)Screen switching key ([4 screens], [One large screen]) Switches the screen display between the full screen display and the quad screen display. 4)[Exit] key Exits the device monitor. 5)Monitor target display Displays the channel No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitor target. 6)Monitor device display area Displays the monitor device display area.

Item Description Device name Displays the device name of the monitor device.

Device number Displays the device number of the monitor device.

Device comment Displays the device comment set for the monitor device.

Device value Displays the device value of the monitor device.

1)

6)

5)

7)

2)

3) 4)

10)9)8) 11)

Device name

Word device

Device comment

Device number Device value

Display format

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.7 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory) 107

10

7)Message display Displays error messages. 8)[Register] key Registers devices. Displays the device entry window when touched. Page 85 Window for entering the device 9)[Test] key Carries out a test operation. Page 88 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test]) 10)[Layput] key Changes the display of items. The display of the following items can be changed. Number of the columns of the devices to be displayed Comments (can be switched between displaying and hiding) Page 92 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout]) 11)[Connect] key Switches the monitor target for the device monitor. Touch the key to display the communication setting dialog. Page 82 Communication setting dialog

Display format Represents the display format of the device value. The character on the left represents the data range of the device. [W]: Word (16 bits) [D]: Double-word (32 bits) [L]: 64 bits

The character string on the right represents the display format of the device value. [K]: Signed decimal [K+]: Unsigned decimal [HEX]: Hexadecimal [BIN]: Binary [EXP]: Exponential notation [FIT]: Decimal representation

The display format can be changed when touched.

Item Description

8 3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.7 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory)

3

3.8 Error Messages and Corrective Actions The following table lists error messages displayed when the device monitor is carried out and describes the corresponding corrective actions.

Error message Explanation Action Failed to communicate with CPU. Communication with the target PLC for

monitoring cannot be established. Check the connection (a connector disconnection, a break in a

cable) between the PLC and GOT. Check if the PLC has caused an error. Refer to the following to check if a network error has occurred. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor)

A device has exceeded a specified device range.

Because the data range was changed to one with a larger number of bits, a device that has exceeded the range is included in the targets for display.

Change the data rage back in the previous number of bits.

The number of the target devices for monitoring has exceeded its maximum.

The number of the target devices for the registration for monitoring is larger than its maximum.

The number of the target devices for monitoring beyond its maximum cannot be registered. Delete unnecessary registered devices before registering.

Displaying device comments has failed. No device comment file exists. Create a device comment file.

Local device monitoring has failed. The target program for local device monitoring does not exist or has been deleted.

Start the local device monitor again and select a program from the alternatives in the list.

Failed to write the value to the device. The target device for writing a value does not exist or the target device is outside the range.

Check the range of devices with the parameter of the PLC.

A device that cannot be monitored exists. A device outside the range is included in those on display.

Change the display position of devices.

The device range has been changed. During GOT startup, the parameter of the PLC was changed then a device on display has fallen outside the range.

Restart the GOT.

Writing a TC set value has failed. The target program for writing a timer or counter setting value does not exist or has been deleted.

Start the TC monitor again and select a program from the alternatives in the list.

The device that has been specified as a security condition is invalid.

The device that has been specified as a device test authorization device for the system security setting does not exist or is outside the device range.

Check the range of devices with the parameter of the PLC. Check the device test authorization device for the system

security setting.

Reading a comment file has failed. If drive A has been specified in the GOT setup as the destination for saving data: The SD card slot cover on the GOT is open.

No stored comment file exists on the SD card or USB memory that has been connected to the GOT.

Close the SD card slot cover and select the comment file again. In the comment file list dialog, select an existing comment file.

Obtaining the program name has failed. No program has been written to the PLC CPU.

To the PLC, write a PC parameter and sequence program that are consistent with each other.

No program is in execution. In using the TC monitor, there is no program being scanned.

Start to scan a program.

3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.8 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 109

11

MEMO

0 3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.8 Error Messages and Corrective Actions

4

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY)

Page 111 Features Page 116 Specifications Page 129 Display Operation Page 143 Setting Display Format Page 144 How to Operate PLC Read Screen Page 150 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen Page 156 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen Page 174 Find/Replace Operation Page 180 Test Operation Page 182 Error Messages and Corrective Action This chapter describes the following functions.

4.1 Features With the sequence program monitor (ladder display), the GOT monitors a sequence program of a controller in the ladder format. The program is editable, and the current device values of the program are changeable. The following shows features of the sequence program monitor (ladder display).

Editing sequence programs on the GOT Sequence programs are editable in the ladder format by using the sequence program monitor (Ladder).

The following screens are displayed with the sequence program monitor (ladder display). PLC read screen Page 144 How to Operate PLC Read Screen Ladder monitor screen Page 150 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen Ladder editor screen Page 156 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen

Function Target CPU Remarks Sequence program monitor (Ladder) QCPU, LCPU The explanation common to the functions shown on the left is referred to as the

explanation of the sequence program monitor (ladder display).Sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) RCPU

Sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder) FX5CPU

X10

Touch a position to input a contact.

Y22

The contact (Always OFF) is input.

SM401X10

Y22

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.1 Features 111

11

Switching display formats, device comment display, and languages The following are available. Switching whether to display or hide device comments Switching languages for file names of sequence programs, comments, and others

Switching device comment display Whether to display or hide device comments used in sequence programs can be switched.

Switching languages (for the sequence program monitor (Ladder)) Preparing a comment file created in either of the following character codes enables character code switching of the header and comment of a file following the language switching in the utility. SJIS GB Big5 KS ASCII When comment files created in each character code are stored in a data storage, you can switch the language to display a comment, regardless of the language selected in the utility.

Switching languages (for the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder)) When the system language is switched in the utility, the comment is switched accordingly. When comment files created in each language are written to the RCPU, you can switch the language to display a comment, regardless of the language selected in the utility.

Switching languages (for the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder)) When the system language is switched in the utility, the comment is switched accordingly. When comment files created in each language are written to the FX5CPU, you can switch the language to display a comment, regardless of the language selected in the utility.

2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.1 Features

4

Displaying registered ladder blocks is available On the Ladder registration monitor window, displaying registered ladder blocks is available. Page 155 Ladder registration monitor window

21

85

87

90

M12

Y43

Y44

21

Ladder registration monitor window

M12

Y43

Y44

Y45

Y46

Y6F

Y70

Y71

Y72

M13

M110

M111

M112

90 Y72

M112

24

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.1 Features 113

11

Enhanced interaction with objects (one-touch ladder jump function) Interaction with the special function switch The automatic PLC read or the device automatic search can be executed at startup of the sequence program monitor (ladder display) by the following method. Place a special function switch on a user-created screen, specify the search file and search device in the special function switch setting, and then touch the special function switch. Even a person who is not the operator familiar with the equipment inside can trace the source of the equipment error without fail by simple operations, reducing time to stop the error. Example) Coil searching by touching a special function switch

Interaction with the alarm display (user) or simple alarm display The sequence program monitor (ladder display) can be started to search for a device having an alarm by the following method. Select an alarm in the alarm display, and touch a key code switch (Display ladder (Ladder Editor)).

Touch the special function button of error process

The sequence program monitor (ladder display) starts and searches for coil "M53" automatically.

(User-created screen)

Operation flow screen

Home position

Lifter down Lifter down

Hand close

Lifter up Lifter up

Forward Back

Hand open

"Forward operation M54" was not turned on since the lifter upper-end sensor (X10) was not turned on.

Lifter lower end

X13

X10

M52 M54 M53

M53

M53 M55 M54

M54

Lifter upper end Lifter up

Lifter up

Forward

Hand close

Ladder Search Device: M53 Special function switch setting

(Ladder monitor screen)

Ladder Search Mode: Coil

M12

X13

Y43 Occurred Comment

09/8/1 13:30:14 Fuse error

Temp. error09/8/1 14:46:49

Y44

Y45

Y46

(User-created screen) (Ladder monitor screen)

The sequence program monitor (ladder display) starts and searches for the device of alarm automatically.

The search result is displayed.

Select an alarm and touch the key code switch. Key code switch setting

Code setting: FFBD : Sequence program monitor (ladder) FFBA : Sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) FFC3 : Sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder)

Display Ladder (Ladder Editor)

4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.1 Features

4

Reading program files and comment files The program files and comment files read from the RCPU, FX5CPU, QCPU, or LCPU are stored in a data storage mounted on the GOT. Therefore, the startup time and the read time are shortened from the next startup.

Comment files written to an SD card with GX Works3 The comment files written to an SD card with GX Works3 can be used for displaying device comments by storing them in the data storage in the GOT.

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.1 Features 115

11

4.2 Specifications System configuration This section explains the system configuration of the sequence program monitor (ladder display). For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1

Target controller

*1 A sequence program that has 260 k steps or more cannot be read. *2 To write a sequence program containing the following instructions to a PLC CPU, the PLC CPU must have a serial number starting with

10102 or later in the first 5 digits.

A sequence program containing the following instruction cannot be written to a PLC CPU.

*3 Only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) can be monitored. *4 The function version must be A2 or later. *5 This model can be monitored only when its operation mode is the process mode. *6 The safety program of the PLC CPU cannot be edited. *7 The device test is not supported. *8 The ladder editor and device test are not supported. *9 If the firmware version is 11 or earlier, the safety CPU cannot read the safety program while monitoring a safety program.

Controller Model RCPU *10*11*12*13*14*15 R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU *1, R120CPU *1,

R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU *1, R120ENCPU *1, R08PCPU *5, R16PCPU *5, R32PCPU *1*5, R120PCPU *1*5, R08SFCPU *6*7*9, R16SFCPU *6*7*9, R32SFCPU *1*6*7*9, R120SFCPU *1*6*7*9

FX5CPU *16 FX5U, FX5UC, FX5UJ *17, FX5S*18*19

QCPU (Q mode) Basic model Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU

High Performance model Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU

Universal model *2 Q00UJCPU, Q00UJCPU-S8, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU *1, Q100UDEHCPU *1, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU

LCPU L02SCPU, L02SCPU-P, L02CPU, L02CPU-P, L06CPU, L06CPU-P, L26CPU, L26CPU-P, L26CPU-BT, L26CPU-PBT

Motion CPU (Q series) *3 Q170MCPU, Q170MCPU-S1, Q170MSCPU, Q170MSCPU-S1

CNC C70 *4 Q173NCCPU

CNC C80 *8 R16NCCPU-S1

Instruction DBKCMP=(P), DBKCMP<>(P), DBKCMP>(P), DBKCMP>=(P), DBKCMP<(P), DBKCMP<=(P), DBK+(P), DBK-(P), DFMOV(P), SFTBR(P), SFTBL(P), SFTWR(P), SFTWL(P), MEAN(P), DMEAN(P), STRINS(P), STRDEL(P), POW(P), POWD(P), LOG10(P), LOG10D(P), SCL(P), DSCL(P), SCL2(P), DSCL2(P), LDDT=, ANDDT=, ORDT=, LDDT<>, ANDDT<>, ORDT<>, LDDT>, ANDDT>, ORDT>, LDDT>=, ANDDT>=, ORDT>=, LDDT<, ANDDT<, ORDT<, LDDT<=, ANDDT<=, ORDT<=, LDTM=, ANDTM=, ORTM=, LDTM<>, ANDTM<>, ORTM<>, LDTM>, ANDTM>, ORTM>, LDTM<=, ANDTM<=, ORTM<=, LDTM<, ANDTM<, ORTM<, LDTM>=, ANDTM>=, ORTM>=, LDPI, LDFI, ANDPI, ANDFI, ORPI, ORFI, CCOM(P)

Instruction TYPERD

6 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications

4

*10 The following instructions cannot be displayed.

*11 Only the RnPCPU supports the following instructions.

*12 Only the RnSFCPU does not support the following instructions.

*13 The following instructions are not available to R00CPU.

*14 The following instructions are not available to R00CPU, R01CPU, and R02CPU.

*15 The following instructions are not available to RnSFCPU and RnPCPU.

*16 The following instructions cannot be displayed.

*17 The following instructions are not available to FX5UJ.

Instruction LD=_U, LD<>_U, LD>_U, LD>=_U, LD<_U, LD<=_U, AND=_U, AND<>_U, AND>_U, AND>=_U, AND<_U, AND<=_U, OR=_U, OR <>_U, OR >_U, OR >=_U, OR <_U, OR <=_U, LDD=_U, LDD<>_U, LDD>_U, LDD>=_U, LDD<_U, LDD<=_U, ANDD=_U, ANDD<>_U, ANDD>_U, ANDD>=_U, ANDD<_U, ANDD<=_U, ORD=_U, ORD<>_U, ORD>_U, ORD>=_U, ORD<_U, ORD<=_U, DI, EI, COM, M.DDRD, MP.DDRD, M.DDWR, MP.DDWR, M.GINT, MP.GINT, M.BITWR, MP.BITWR, M.CHGA, MP.CHGA, M.CHGAS, MP.CHGAS, M.CHGT, MP.CHGT, M.CHGV, MP.CHGV, M.CHGVS, MP.CHGVS, M.MCNST, MP.MCNST, M.SFCS, MP.SFCS, QMSEND

Instruction S.IN, S.OUT1, S.OUT2, S.MOUT, S.DUTY, S.BC, S.PSUM, S.PID, S.2PID, S.PIDP, S.SPI, S.IPD, S.BPI, S.R, S.PHPL, S.LLAG, S.I, S.D, S.DED, S.HS, S.LS, S.MID, S.AVE, S.LIMIT, S.VLMT1, S.VLMT2, S.ONF2, S.ONF3, S.DBND, S.PGS, S.SEL, S.BUMP, S.AMR, S.FG, S.IFG, S.FLT, S.SUM, S.TPC, S.ENG, S.IENG, S.ADD, S.SUB, S.MUL, S.DIV, S.SQR, S.ABS, S.>, S.<, S.=, S.>=, S.<=, S.AT1

Instruction LD Sn/BLm\Sn, LDI Sn/BLm\Sn, AND Sn/BLm\Sn, ANI Sn/BLm\Sn, OR Sn/BLm\Sn, ORI Sn/BLm\Sn, LD BLm, LDI BLm, AND BLm, ANI BLm, OR BLm, ORI BLm, MOV K4Sn/BLm\K4Sn, MOVP K4Sn/BLm\K4Sn, DMOV K4Sn/BLm\K4Sn, DMOVP K4Sn/BLm\K4Sn, BMOV K4Sn/BLm\K4Sn, BMOVP K4Sn/BLm\K4Sn, SET BLm, RST BLm, PAUSE BLm, RSTART BLm, SET Sn/BLm\Sn, RST Sn/BLm\Sn, BRSET, D.DDRD, DP.DDRD, D.DDWR, DP.DDWR, D.GINT, DP.GINT

Instruction SP.FREAD, SP.FWRITE, LOGTRG, LOGTRGR

Instruction DBOPEN, DBOPENP, DBCLOSE, DBCLOSEP, DBINSERT, DBINSERTP, DBUPDATE, DBUPDATEP, DBSELECT, DBSELECTP, DBDELETE, DBDELETEP, DBIMPORT, DBIMPORTP, DBEXPORT, DBEXPORTP, DBTRANS, DBTRANSP, DBCOMMIT, DBCOMMITP, DBROLBAK, DBROLBAKP

Instruction CMP, CMPP, CMP_U, CMPP_U, DCMP, DCMPP, DCMP_U, DCMPP_U, ZCP, ZCPP, ZCP_U, ZCPP_U, DZCP, DZCPP, DZCP_U, DZCPP_U, SFTR, SFTRP, SFTL, SFTLP, WSFR, WSFRP, WSFL, WSFLP, SMOV, SMOVP, DSWAP, DSWAPP, ECMP, ECMPP, EDCMP, EDCMPP, EZCP, EZCPP, EDZCP, EDZCPP, CCD, CCDP, SERMM, SERMMP, DSERMM, DSERMMP, BON, BONP, DBON, DBONP, SQRT, SQRTP, DSQRT, DSQRTP, CRC, CRCP, TCMP, TCMPP, TZCP, TZCPP, HOURM, DHOURM, SP.SLMPSND, SP.FTPPUT, SP.FTPGET, PID

Instruction LD=_U, LD<>_U, LD>_U, LD>=_U, LD<_U, LD<=_U, AND=_U, AND<>_U, AND>_U, AND>=_U, AND<_U, AND<=_U, OR=_U, OR<>_U, OR>_U, OR>=_U, OR<_U, OR<=_U, LDD=_U, LDD<>_U, LDD>_U, LDD>=_U, LDD<_U, LDD<=_U, ANDD=_U, ANDD<>_U, ANDD>_U, ANDD>=_U, ANDD<_U, ANDD<=_U, ORD=_U, ORD<>_U, ORD>_U, ORD>=_U, ORD<_U, ORD<=_U, TRAN (for FX5U and FX5UC), RBFM (for FX5UJ and FX5S), WBFM (for FX5UJ and FX5S)

Instruction $MOV_WS, $MOVP_WS, WS2SJIS, WS2SJISP, SJIS2WS, SJIS2WSP, SJIS2WSB, SJIS2WSBP, LD S/BL\S, LDI S/BL\S, AND S/BL\S, ANI S/BL\S, OR S/BL\S, ORI S/BL\S, LD BL, LDI BL, AND BL, ANI BL, OR BL, ORI BL, MOV KnS/BL\KnS, MOVP KnS/BL\KnS, DMOV KnS/BL\KnS, DMOVP KnS/BL\KnS, BMOV KnS/BL\KnS, BMOVP KnS/BL\KnS, SET BL, RST BL, SET S/BL\S, RST S/BL\S, OUT S/BL\S, ZRST S/BL\S, ZRSTP S/BL\S, TRAN, SP.FDELETE, SP.FCOPY, SP.FMOVE, SP.FRENAME, SP.FSTATUS, SP.FTPGET, G.SLMPSND, GP.SLMPSND, G.CCPASETX, GP.CCPASETX

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications 117

11

*18 The following instructions are not available to FX5S.

*19 An SD card slot is available for FX5SCPU as an option. If you use an SD card, insert it into the SD card slot.

Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types. (: Available, : Unavailable)

*1 The LCPU does not support the connection type. *2 When the GOT is connected to LCPU, use L6ADP-R2. *3 For the MELSECNET/10 connection, use a QCPU and network module (QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, QJ71LP21G, and

QJ71BR11) with the function version B or later. *4 Indicates the CC-Link IE controller network connection. *5 Indicates CC-Link IE field network connection. *6 Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU are not available. *7 Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station). *8 Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4). *9 Ladder editor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.

Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following. Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function

System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system applications (extended functions) for the sequence program monitor (ladder display) to the GOT. For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required. For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Instruction FROM, FROMP, DFROM, DFROMP, TO, TOP, DTO, DTOP, FROMD, FROMDP, DFROMD, DFROMDP, TOD, TODP, DTOD, DTODP, GP.READ, GP.SREAD, GP.WRITE, GP.SWRITE, GP.SEND, GP.RECV, G.RECVS, G.CCPASET, GP.CCPASET, G.UINI, GP.UINI, G.ABRST1, G.ABRST2, GP.PSTRT1, GP.PSTRT2, GP.TEACH1, GP.TEACH2, GP.PFWRT, GP.PINIT, GP.OPEN, GP.CLOSE, GP.SOCRCV, GP.SOCSND, LD S/BL\S, LDI S/BL\S, AND S/BL\S, ANI S/BL\S, OR S/BL\S, ORI S/BL\S, LD BL, LDI BL, AND BL, ANI BL, OR BL, ORI BL, MOV KnS/BL\KnS, MOVP KnS/BL\KnS, DMOV KnS/BL\KnS, DMOVP KnS/BL\KnS, BMOV KnS/BL\KnS, BMOVP KnS/BL\KnS, SET BL, RST BL, SET S/BL\S, RST S/BL\S, OUT S/BL\S, ZRST S/BL\S, ZRSTP S/BL\S, TRAN, G.SLMPSND, GP.SLMPSND, G.CCPASETX, GP.CCPASETX

Function Connection form between GOT and controller

Name Description Bus connection *1

Direct CPU connection (serial) *2

Serial communication connection

Ethernet connection *9

MELSECNET/H connection *1, MELSECNET/ 10 connection *1*3

CC-Link IE controller connection *1*4, CC-Link IE field connection *5*6

CC-Link connection

ID *7 G4 *8

sequence program monitor (ladder)

Monitors and edits a sequence program in the ladder format in a controller, or changes current device values of the program.

8 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications

4

Required hardware The following hardware is required.

For the devices whose operations have been validated by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation, refer to the following Technical Bulletin. List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT2000 Series and GOT SIMPLE Series (for Overseas) (GOT-A-0160) Operation Check Results of Non-Mitsubishi SD Cards on GOT2000 Series Units (GOT-A-0065)

Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable. For the devices whose operations have been validated by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation, refer to the following Technical Bulletin. List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT2000 Series and GOT SIMPLE Series (for Overseas) (GOT-A-0160)

Hardware Data Storage (SD card, USB memory, and etc)

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications 119

12

Devices and range that can be monitored The device range varies depending on the CPU to be used.

When RCPU is connected (: Possible, : Impossible)

Device *1 Device range Program display

Device monitor display

Search operation

Device comment display

Input RCPU: X0 to X2FFF, DX0 to DXFFF CNC C80: X0 to X1FFF

Output RCPU: Y0 to Y2FFF, DY0 to DYFFF CNC C80: Y0 to Y1FFF

Internal relay Rn(EN)CPU: M0 to M161882111 RnPCPU: M0 to M94773247 RnSFCPU: M0 to M94674943 CNC C80: M0 to M61439

Latch relay RCPU: L0 to L32767 CNC C80: L0 to L1023

Link relay Rn(EN)CPU: B0 to B9A61FFF RnPCPU: B0 to B5A61FFF RnSFCPU: B0 to B5A49FFF CNC C80: B0 to BDFFF

Timer Rn(EN)CPU: T0 to T8993439 RnPCPU: T0 to T5265151 RnSFCPU: T0 to T5259711 CNC C80: T0 to T2047

Long timer Rn(EN)CPU: LT0 to LT2529407 RnPCPU: LT0 to LT1480831 RnSFCPU: LT0 to LT1479295

Retentive timer Rn(EN)CPU: ST0 to ST8993439 RnPCPU: ST0 to ST5265151 RnSFCPU: ST0 to ST5259711 CNC C80: ST0 to ST127

Long retentive timer Rn(EN)CPU: LS0 to LS2529407 RnPCPU: LS0 to LS1480831 RnSFCPU: LS0 to LS1479295

Counter Rn(EN)CPU: C0 to C8993439 RnPCPU: C0 to C5265151 RnSFCPU: C0 to C5259711 CNC C80: C0 to C512

Long counter Rn(EN)CPU: LC0 to LC4761215 RnPCPU: LC0 to LC2787391 RnSFCPU: LC0 to LC2784543

Data register Rn(EN)CPU: D0 to D10117631 RnPCPU: D0 to D5923327 RnSFCPU: D0 to D5917183 CNC C80: D0 to D8191

Link register Rn(EN)CPU: W0 to W9A61FF RnPCPU: W0 to W5A61FF RnSFCPU: W0 to W5A49FF CNC C80: W0 to W2FFF

Annunciator RCPU: F0 to F32767 CNC C80: F0 to F2047

Edge relay RCPU: V0 to V32767 CNC C80: V0 to V511

File register Rn(EN)CPU: R0 to 32767, ZR0 to ZR10027007 RnPCPU: R0 to R32767, ZR0 to ZR5832703 RnSFCPU: R0 to R32767, ZR0 to ZR5832703 CNC C80: R0 to R32767

0 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications

4

*1 For applicable devices and device ranges, refer to manual of the PLC CPU. *2 Device cannot be replaced. *3 The range of the monitoring-supported devices for the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) is U3E0 to 3\G524287 (number of

devices: 512K). *4 Searches for the device that exactly matches the specified device.

Link special relay Rn(EN)CPU: SB0 to SB9A61FFF RnPCPU: SB0 to SB5A61FFF RnSFCPU: SB0 to SB5A49FFF CNC C80: SB0 to SB3FF

Link special register Rn(EN)CPU: SW0 to SW9A61FF RnPCPU: SW0 to SW5A61FF RnSFCPU: SW0 to SW5A49FF CNC C80: SW0 to SW3FF

Step relay RCPU: S0 to S16383

Index register RCPU: Z0 to Z23

Long index register RCPU: LZ0 to LZ11

Special relay RCPU:SM0 to SM4095

Special register RnSFCPU: SD0 to SD4095 CNC C80: SD0 to SD4095

Function input RCPU: FX0 to FXF

Function output RCPU: FY0 to FYF

Function register RCPU: FD0 to FD4

Link direct device RCPU: J\

Module access device RCPU: U\, U3En\

CPU buffer memory access device

RCPU: U3E0 to 3\G0 to 268435455 *3 *4

CPU buffer memory access device (fixed- cycle communication area)

RCPU: U3E0 to 3\HG0 to 12287 *4

Nesting RCPU: N0 to N14

Pointer RCPU: P0 to P32767 *2

Interrupt pointer RCPU: I0 to l1023 *2

SFC block device RCPU: BL0 to BL319, BL\S

Network No. specification device

RCPU: J0 to J255

I/O No. specification device

RCPU: U0 to U1FF, U3E0 to U3E3

Module refresh device RCPU: RD0 to RD1048575

Safety input relay RnSFCPU: SA\X0 to SA\X2FFF

Safety output relay RnSFCPU: SA\Y0 to SA\Y2FFF

Safety link relay RnSFCPU: SA\B0 to SA\B9BFFF

Safety internal relay RnSFCPU: SA\M0 to SA\M638975

Safety timer RnSFCPU: SA\T0 to SA\T35487

Safety counter RnSFCPU: SA\C0 to SA\C35487

Safety retentive timer RnSFCPU: SA\ST0 to SA\ST35487

Safety special relay RnSFCPU: SA\SM0 to SA\SM4095

Safety data register RnSFCPU: SA\D0 to SA\D39935

Safety special register RnSFCPU: SA\SD0 to SA\SD4095

Safety link register RnSFCPU: SA\W0 to SA\W9BFF

Device *1 Device range Program display

Device monitor display

Search operation

Device comment display

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications 121

12

When FX5CPU is connected (: Possible, : Impossible)

*1 For applicable devices and device ranges, refer to manual of the PLC CPU. *2 Device cannot be replaced. *3 Searches for the device that exactly matches the specified device. *4 When SFC is set to "Use" in the SFC program setting of the CPU parameter, it can be used only for SFC control instructions.

For details, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-F FX5 Programming Manual (Program Design)

*5 The following shows the instructions restricted when the step relay (S) is used.

Device *1 Device range Program display Device monitor display

Search operation Device comment display

Input X0 to 1777, DX0 to 1777

Output Y0 to 1777, DY0 to 1777

Internal relay M0 to 32767

Latch relay L0 to 32767

Link relay B0 to 7FFF

Timer T0 to 1023

Retentive timer ST0 to 1023

Counter C0 to 1023

Long counter LC0 to 1023 *3

Data register D0 to 7999

Link register W0 to 7FFF

Annunciator F0 to 32767

File register R0 to 32767

Link special relay SB0 to 7FFF

Link special register SW0 to 7FFF

Step relay *4*5 S0 to 4095

Index register Z0 to 23

Long index register LZ0 to 11 *3

Special relay SM0 to 9999

Special register SD0 to 11999

Module access device U\

Nesting N0 to 14

Pointer P0 to 4095 *2

Interrupt pointer I0 to 177 *2

SFC block device BL0 to BL31

Step relay (block) BL0\S0 to BL31\S511

Instruction Instruction name Restrictions on the display Editing restrictions Output instruction Out (except for the timer,

counter, and annunciator) OUT [OUT Sn] is displayed.

"[ ]" indicates the conductive status. -

Contact instruction Pulse operation start Pulse series connection Pulse parallel connection

LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF

When the program is editable, the ladder block that contains instructions displays only the first step number of the ladder block as an error block. When a step relay (S) is used for an instruction, the step relay (S) is not targeted for a device search.

Programs cannot be edited using the step relay (S).

Pulse NOT operation start Pulse NOT series connection Pulse NOT parallel connection

LDPI, LDFI, ANDPI, ANDFI, ORPI, ORFI

Relational operation instruction

Comparing 16-bit binary data LD, AND, OR

Comparing 32-bit binary data LDD, ANDD, ORD

Structuring instruction

FOR to NEXT FOR When the program is editable, the ladder block that contains instructions displays only the first step number of the ladder block as an error block. For the programs that cannot be edited, the display differs depending on the ladder structure.

Master control instruction

Setting of the master control instruction

MC When a step relay (S) is used for an instruction, the step relay (S) is not targeted for a device search.

-

2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications

4

When QCPU or LCPU is connected (: Possible, : Impossible)

*1 The GOT can monitor local devices. For applicable devices and device ranges, refer to manual of the PLC CPU. *2 The extended data register and extended link register are applicable to Universal model QCPU only. *3 Device cannot be replaced.

Device *1 Device range Program display Device monitor display Search operation Input X0 to 1FFF, DX0 to FFF

Output Y0 to 1FFF, DY0 to FFF

Internal relay *1 M0 to 8191 to 61439

Latch relay L0 to 32767

Link relay *2 B0 to 1FFF to EFFF

Timer T0 to 32767

Retentive timer ST0 to 32767

Counter C0 to 32767

Data register D0 to 12287

Link register W0 to 1FFF

Annunciator F0 to 32767

Edge relay V0 to 2047

File register R0 to 32767

ZR0 to 4849663

Extended data register *2 D0 to 4910079

Extended link register *2 W0 to 4AEBFF

Link special relay SB0 to 7FFF

Link special register SW0 to 7FFF

Index register Z0 to 19

Special relay SM0 to 2047

Special register SD0 to 2047

Function input FX0 to F

Function output FY0 to F

Function register FD0 to 4

Link direct device J\

Module access device J\ U3En\

Nesting N0 to 14

Pointer P0 to 8191 *3

Interrupt pointer I0 to 255 *3

SFC block device BL0 to 319

SFC transition device TR0 to 511, BL\TR

Network No. specification device J0 to 255

I/O No. specification device U0 to 1FF 3E0 to 3

Macro instruction argument device VD0 to

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications 123

12

Access range The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller. For details of the access range, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1

Precautions

Precautions for sequence program monitor (Ladder) Operation while the sequence program monitor (Ladder) is running Do not perform the following operations with the GOT during sequence program monitor (Ladder) startup. Doing so may cause the stored data to be deleted, or the sequence program monitor (Ladder) to run improperly. Opening the SD card cover (when an SD card is used) Installing/removing the data storage (SD card or USB memory)

Backup Before editing a sequence program with the sequence program monitor (Ladder), make sure to back up the program with the backup/restoration function so that you can restore the original program. Page 401 BACKUP/RESTORATION

Precautions for the online program change Precautions for the online program change are the same as the online program change with GX Works2/GX Developer, except the followings. For details of precautions on the online program change, refer to the followings. GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual (Common) GX Developer Version8 Operating Manual QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) The following items are the difference between GX Works2/GX Developer online program change. Online program change is not available for programs other than program memories. Online program change cannot be executed with the pointer at the top. Do not execute the online program change simultaneously from multiple points. Online program change is not available by file unit. No option setting is available for preventing from executing the fall instruction. Online program change is not available when the reserved area is exceeded by the change. Execute Write to PLC when the reserved area is exceeded. The setting whether to transfer or not to the program memory cannot be changed after the writing is completed. When the online program change to the universal model QCPU is executed, all the program cache memory information is transferred at once, after the online program change. If the setting of GOT days and time is February 29th when using the Q00JCPU, Q01CPU or Q00CPU, the online program change cannot be executed. Change days and time of the GOT to something other than February 29th and execute the online program change again.

Precautions for creating the program The sequence program monitor (ladder) is not available for the program which uses labels. When using the sequence program monitor (ladder), create the program in the simple project which does not use labels.

Programs that cannot be edited The following programs cannot be edited with the ladder editor. Program consisting of ladder blocks with 25 lines or more Even if a ladder block is displayed with 24 lines or less on GX Works2 or GX Developer, the block may be displayed with 25 lines or more on the GOT.

4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications

4

Precautions for sequence program monitor (iQ-R Ladder) Operation while the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) is running Do not perform the following operations on the GOT while the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) is running. Doing so may cause the stored data to be deleted, or the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) to run improperly. Opening the SD card cover (when an SD card is used) Installing/removing the data storage (SD card or USB memory)

Backup Before editing a sequence program with the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder), make sure to back up the program with the backup/restoration function so that you can restore the original program. Page 401 BACKUP/RESTORATION

Files and programs that cannot be displayed on the ladder display The ladder display does not support the following files and programs. File protected with a security key File protected with a block password Ladder block that includes structured text or inline structured text Files that include the output instruction using one of the following labels Timer, retentive timer, counter, long timer, long retentive timer, long counter

Programs that cannot be edited The following programs cannot be edited with the ladder editor. Program consisting of multiple program blocks Program other than the ladder program Program using a label Program using an inline ST Program using an MC/MCR instruction Program using a statement that exceeds 64 one-byte characters Program using a character string constant that exceeds 32 one-byte characters Program using a note that exceeds 32 one-byte characters Program using a peripheral statement or note Program using a line feed in a statement, note, or character string constant Program using the special character ($") in a character string constant Safety program Program using an FB or FUN Program consisting of ladder blocks with 25 lines or more Even if a ladder block is displayed with 24 lines or less on GX Works3, the block may be displayed with 25 lines or more on the GOT.

Unreadable programs The sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) cannot read the sequence program files, if the files use notes for the instructions that start with "M." or "MP." to access other CPU modules.

Display of programs using FBs or FUNs The ladder monitor screen displays programs that FBs or FUNs, while the programs look differently in GX Works3. The programs contained in FBs or FUNs do not display. In the location where an FB or FUN is used, a function block call statement or function call statement appears. The following shows FBs or FUNs that are displayed as a call instruction. Subroutine type function block (created by users) Standard function block Function block and function included in the application library or MELSOFT Library (Sample library) Function (created by users) Standard function

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications 125

12

Display of programs using labels The sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) does not display label names.

Available constants Only the constants available for QCPU are editable with the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder). The constants available for QCPU are as follows. K: Decimal constant H: Hexadecimal constant E: Real number "": Character string When GX Works3 displays a ladder program using constants other than the above, the constants are displayed as they are. If you edit the constants with the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and then GX Works3 reads the program, the display and settings of the constants are changed to those available for QCPU.

When $" is included in a character string constant When $" is included in a character string constant, $" and subsequent characters are not displayed on the ladder monitor screen and the ladder editor screen.

When a line feed character is included When a line feed character is included in a note or statement, the line feed character and subsequent characters are not displayed on the ladder editor screen.

6 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications

4

Precautions for sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder) Operation while the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder) is running Do not perform the following operations on the GOT while the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder) is running. Doing so may cause the stored data to be deleted, or the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder) to run improperly. Opening the SD card cover (when an SD card is used) Installing/removing the data storage (SD card or USB memory)

Backup Before editing a sequence program with the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder), make sure to back up the program with the backup/restoration function so that you can restore the original program. Page 401 BACKUP/RESTORATION

Files and programs that cannot be displayed on the ladder display The ladder display does not support the following files and programs. File protected with a security key File protected with a block password Ladder block that includes structured text or inline structured text Files that include the output instruction using one of the following labels Timer, retentive timer, counter, long counter

Programs that cannot be edited The following programs cannot be edited with the ladder editor. Program consisting of multiple program blocks Program other than the ladder program Program using a label Program using an inline ST Program using an MC/MCR instruction Program using a statement that exceeds 64 one-byte characters Program using a character string constant that exceeds 32 one-byte characters Program using a note that exceeds 32 one-byte characters Program using a peripheral statement or note Program using a line feed in a statement, note, or character string constant Program using the special character ($") in a character string constant Program using an FB or FUN Program consisting of ladder blocks with 25 lines or more Even if a ladder block is displayed with 24 lines or less on GX Works3, the block may be displayed with 25 lines or more on the GOT.

Display of programs using FBs or FUNs The ladder monitor screen displays programs that FBs or FUNs, while the programs look differently in GX Works3. The programs contained in FBs or FUNs are not displayed. In the location where an FB or FUN is used, a function block call statement or function call statement appears. The following shows FBs or FUNs that are displayed as a call instruction. Function block (created by users, user library) *1

Standard function block Module function block *1

Function block and function included in the application library or MELSOFT Library (Sample library) *1

Function (created by users, user library) Standard function *1 For a macro type, the function block is displayed by selecting whether to display the program that uses the function block.

For details, refer to the following. Page 149 Display in the sequence program monitor

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications 127

12

Display of programs using labels The sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder) does not display label names.

Available constants Only the constants available for QCPU are editable with the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder). The constants available for QCPU are as follows. K: Decimal constant H: Hexadecimal constant E: Real number "": Character string When GX Works3 displays a ladder program using constants other than the above, the constants are displayed as they are. If you edit the constants with the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder) and then GX Works3 reads the program, the display and settings of the constants are changed to those available for QCPU.

When $" is included in a character string constant When $" is included in a character string constant, $" and subsequent characters are not displayed on the ladder monitor screen and the ladder editor screen.

When a line feed character is included When a line feed character is included in a note or statement, the line feed character and subsequent characters are not displayed on the ladder editor screen.

8 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications

4

4.3 Display Operation This section explains how to display the operation screen for the sequence program monitor (ladder display) after the GOT is turned on.

1. Power on the GOT.

2. Display the sequence program monitor (ladder display) screen. The display methods include the following two types. Using the special function switch (Sequence program monitor (ladder display)) set in the project For how to set the special function switch, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Starting from the utility To start the sequence program monitor (Ladder), touch [Monitor] [Seq.program monitor(Ladder)] from the main menu. Touch [Monitor] [Seq. program monitor] from the Main Menu. To start the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder), touch [Monitor] [Seq. program monitor (iQ-R Ladder)] from the main menu. To start the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder), touch [Monitor] [Seq. program monitor (iQ-F Ladder)] from the utility main menu. For how to display the utility, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

3. Set the channel No., network No., station number, and CPU number in the communication setting dialog. Page 147 Communication setting window

4. Read data from the PLC and display the program list window. Page 148 Program list window Reading data from the PLC is not required when the GOT is restarted, because sequence programs and comment files are stored in a data storage with the sequence program monitor (ladder display).

5. Select a program to be displayed from the program list and display the ladder monitor screen. Page 150 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen

6. Display the ladder editor screen from the edit menu of the ladder monitor screen. Page 156 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen For how to start the sequence program monitor (ladder display) using the one-touch ladder jump function, refer to the following. Page 130 Start operation when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function For the changing screens for the security setting, refer to the following. Page 139 Setting the security

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation 129

13

Start operation when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function By using a special function switch, alarm display (user), or others, you can start the sequence program monitor (ladder display) to automatically read sequence program files or search for a device. The following shows objects which can use the One-touch Ladder Jump function.

Before executing the automatic PLC read Setting the automatic PLC read When reading a sequence program file or a comment file from controllers, the automatic PLC read have to be set on GT Designer3 (GOT2000) or in the utility. For the setting of automatic PLC read, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) Specifying an automatic PLC read file With the special function switch or alarm display (user), the target sequence program of automatic PLC read can be specified. However, the operation differs depending on the automatic PLC read setting on GT Designer3 (GOT2000) or in the utility.

Object Special function switch, alarm display (user), simple alarm display

Automatic PLC read setting of GT Designer3/utility

File name specification in objects

Operation

Done Done The specified sequence program file is read automatically.

None All sequence program files are read automatically.

None Done No sequence program file is read. To search automatically, if a sequence program file of the specified file name among the sequence program files read in the GOT exists, it is executed.

None No sequence program file is read. To search automatically, if a sequence program file read in the GOT exists, it is executed to all files.

0 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation

4

Starting from the special function switch To start the sequence program monitor (Ladder), touch a special function switch that has the following settings: [Sequence Program Monitor (Ladder)] is selected for [Switch Action], and [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] is selected. To start the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder), touch a special function switch that has the following settings: [Sequence Program Monitor (iQ-R ladder)] is selected for [Switch Action], and [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] is selected. To start the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder), touch a special function switch that has the following settings: [Sequence Program Monitor (iQ-F ladder)] is selected for [Switch Action], and [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] is selected. Operation at start differs depending on the setting contents of the special function switch. For the setting items for the special function switch, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual (: Set, : Not set)

*1 When [Specify Search Device] is selected, set [Ladder Search Device] and [Ladder Search Mode]. The setting of PLC station number is included in the [Ladder Search Device] setting.

*2 When [Specify Connected Station] is selected, set [CH No.] and [Network]. If [Other] in [Network] is selected, also set [Net No.], [Station No.] and [CPU Machine].

Operations for searching a device with specifying the file name

Operations for searching a device without specifying the file name

Operations for searching a connected station with specifying the file name

Operations for setting a connected station without specifying the file name

Operations for the special function switch when not using the One-touch Ladder Jump function When the [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] is not selected, the operation for touching the special function switch is the same as when starting from the utility. Page 129 Display Operation

Setting Operation for touching the special function switchSearch Method Specify Search File

Specify Search Device *1 Operations for searching a device with specifying the file name

Operations for searching a device without specifying the file name

Specify Connected Station *2 Operations for searching a connected station with specifying the file name

Operations for setting a connected station without specifying the file name

Starting the sequence program monitor (ladder display)

Automatic PLC read (The set sequence program file)

Automatic search for Ladder Search Device (Coil/Factor)

Ladder monitor screen (The search result is displayed.)

Starting the sequence program monitor (ladder display)

Automatic PLC read (All sequence program files)

Automatic search for Ladder Search Device (Coil/Factor)

Ladder monitor screen (The search result is displayed.)

Starting the sequence program monitor (ladder display)

Automatic PLC read (The set sequence program file)

Ladder monitor screen

Starting the sequence program monitor (ladder display)

PLC read screen

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation 131

13

Starting from the alarm display (user) The sequence program monitor (ladder display) can be started to search for a device having an alarm by the following method. Select an alarm in an alarm display (user) and touch a key code switch ([Display Ladder (Ladder Editor)]). Operation at start differs depending on the setting contents of the user alarm observation. For the setting items for user alarm observation, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual (: Set, : Not set)

*1 The setting of PLC station number is included in the target device. Operations for setting the Ladder Search Mode and file name

Operations for setting the Ladder Search Mode

Starting from the simple alarm display By selecting an alarm in the simple alarm display and touching the key code switch (setting the key code of the [Display ladder (Ladder Editor)]), the sequence program monitor (ladder) can be started and the device of alarm can be coil-searched.

For the simple alarm display, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Ladder search setting *1 Operation for touching the key code switchLadder Search Mode Specify Search File

Operations for setting the Ladder Search Mode and file name

Operations for setting the Ladder Search Mode

Starting the sequence program monitor (ladder display)

Automatic PLC read (The set sequence program file)

Automatic search for Ladder Search Device (Coil/Factor)

Ladder monitor screen (The search result is displayed.)

Starting the sequence program monitor (ladder display)

Automatic PLC read (All sequence program files)

Automatic search for Ladder Search Device (Coil/Factor)

Ladder monitor screen (The search result is displayed.)

Starting the sequence program monitor (ladder display)

Automatic PLC read (All sequence program files)

Automatic search for Ladder Search Device (Coil)

Ladder monitor screen (The search result is displayed.)

2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation

4

Changing screens The following describes how to change the screen.

*1 Only for the sequence program monitor (Ladder)

Start

Utility Main Menu

or

user-created monitor screen

At the first startup

Password input window

PLC read screen

Communication setting window

Ladder registration monitor window

Device test window

Factor search window

Program list window

Ladder monitor screen

Ladder editor screen

Jump window Device search window

Comment file list window*1

Replace device window*1 Change open/close cantact window

Verify result window*1 Remote operation window*1

Copy program memory data into ROM window

Enter ladder program window

*1

*1

Display format window

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation 133

13

Changing screens when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function For changing screens when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function, refer to the following. Page 130 Start operation when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function Changing screens when setting the security For changing screens when setting the security, refer to the following. Page 139 Setting the security

Setting ladder data storage location The ladder data (sequence programs and device comments) used for the sequence program monitor (ladder display) can be stored in a selected drive. Only the A drive (standard SD card) or B drive (USB drive) is available for storing ladder data. For the ladder data storage destination setting, refer to the following. When setting with GOT utility GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) When setting with GT Designer3 (GOT2000) GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation

4

Reading comment files from data storage

Sequence program monitor (Ladder) The sequence program monitor (Ladder) uses the comment files that are stored in the data storage in the GOT.

Procedure for using comment files stored in data storage The following shows the procedure for using a comment file stored in a data storage.

1. Create a SEQCMNT folder in a data storage. When the SEQCMNT folder already exists, creating a new SEQCMNT folder is not required.

2. In the SEQCMNT folder, create folders for CH No., network No., station No., and CPU number of the monitored controller with a hierarchy as shown below.

Assign numbers to "*" marks. (When the CH No. is 1, the folder name is CH01. When the monitor target is the host station, the folder name is ST255.)

3. In the CPU No. folder, create folders for storing comment files by character code.

Item Folder name CH No. CH**

Network No. NET***

Station No. ST***

CPU No. CPU**

Item Folder name Folder for SJIS code SJIS

Folder for GB code GB

Folder for Big5 code Big5

Folder for KS code KS

Folder for ASCII code ASCII

Channel No.

Network No.

Station No.

CPU No.

CPU No.

For storing comments with KS code

For storing comments with ASCII code

For storing comments with GB code

For storing comments with SJIS code

For storing comments with Big5 code

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation 135

13

4. Copy a comment file (.wcd) in the saved project.

When the GX Works2 project is used, the creation method of a comment file (.wcd) differs depending on whether the project used can be or cannot be saved in the GX Developer format. Project that can be saved in the GX Developer format A comment file (.wcd) is created when the project is saved in the GX Developer format. Project that cannot be saved in the GX Developer format Export the project by using [Write IC Memory Card] of GX Works2, and change the extension of the comment file from [.qcd] to [.wcd].

5. Store the copied comment files in the folders for each character code in the data storage. Example: Storing comment files with ASCII code in the ASCII folder.

6. Install the data storage with the comment file on the GOT.

Restrictions on using comment files If the comments of a comment file stored in the data storage are displayed, the comments that are assigned to the bits of word devices cannot be displayed. Displaying comments in a language different from the language of the utility Store the comment file corresponding to the language to display comments in the data storage. Switch comment files on the Ladder monitor screen for displaying the comments in appropriate language.

6 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation

4

Sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder) The sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder) use the comment files that are stored in the data storage in the GOT. The following shows the characters and the number of characters usable for the name of a comment file. One-byte alphanumeric characters Symbols When the comment files are used for all the controllers: 60 one-byte characters or less When the comment files are used for a specified controller: 38 one-byte characters or less

Procedure for using comment files stored in data storage The following shows the procedure for using a comment file stored in a data storage.

1. Create a SEQCMNT folder in a data storage. When the SEQCMNT folder already exists, creating a new SEQCMNT folder is not required.

2. In the SEQCMNT folder, create folders for CH No., network No., station No., and CPU number of the monitored controller with a hierarchy as shown below.

Assign numbers to "*" marks. (When the CH No. is 1, the folder name is CH01. When the monitor target is the host station, the folder name is ST255.)

3. When the comment files are used for a specified controller, store the comment files (.DCM) and SourceInfo.CAB in the CPU number folder corresponding to the monitored controller.

When the comment files are used for all the controllers, store the comment files (.DCM) and SourceInfo.CAB directly under the [SEQCMNT] folder.

4. Install the data storage with the comment file on the GOT.

Displaying comments in a language different from the language of the utility Store the comment file corresponding to the language to display comments in the data storage. Switch comment files on the Ladder monitor screen for displaying the comments in appropriate language.

Item Folder name CH No. CH**

Network No. NET***

Station No. ST***

CPU No. CPU**

Channel No.

Network No.

Station No.

CPU No.

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation 137

13

Program update check The GOT checks if there is any difference between sequence program files read in the GOT and sequence programs stored in controllers, while the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder Editor screen is displayed. Only the sequence program monitor (Ladder) supports the program update check.

Specification of the program update check Check criterion The updated dates and times of sequence program files are compared.

Check timing The program update is checked when the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder editor screen are displayed. After that, it is checked in a five minutes cycle while the Ladder monitor screen is displayed and in a two minutes cycle while the Ladder Editor screen is displayed.

Operations for the program update check

No

Display the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder editor screen.

Are the updated dates and times of a target

to be compared the same as those of a sequence program file, acquired

from controllers?

If the updated dates and times of sequence programs are different, the following dialog box is displayed.

Yes

Touch the [OK] button.

The updated dates and times of sequence program files read in the GOT are set as targets to be compared.

The updated dates and times acquired from controllers are set as targets to be compared.

While the Ladder monitor screen is displayed : Wait for five minutes While the Ladder editor screen is displayed : Wait for two minutes

Touch the [Cancel] button.

The updated dates and times of sequence program files in controllers are acquired.

The PLC Read Screen is displayed with sequence program files different in their dates and times selected in the File list (target controller).

8 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation

4

Setting the security The device test window and Ladder editor screen displays can be limited by passwords.

Specification of the security setting Security types

The restriction types above can be used together.

Setting method for security To configure the security settings, select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Security] from the menu of GT Designer3 to display the [Environmental Setting] window, and select the [Functional Operation Security] tab. The following shows the setting method for each security type.

For the setting of the [Environmental Setting] dialog, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Changing screens when setting the security

Type Description Restriction by bit devices The changing screens is restricted by the Authorization Device.

The changing screens is authorized when the Authorization Device is ON.

Restriction by a password The changing screens is restricted by a Password. When changing screens, the security password input dialog box is displayed.

Type Setting method Restriction by bit devices Select the [Authorization Device] check box of [Device Test Operation] or [Ladder Editor Screen Display]

and set bit devices.

Restriction by a password Set [Password] of [Device Test Operation] or [Ladder Editor Screen Display].

Perform the operation to switch to the device test window or Ladder editor screen.

Yes

Is the Authorization Device set?

Is the Authorization Device ON?

Is the password set?

Yes

The security password input dialog box is displayed. Input a password.

Is the password correct?

Yes

The device test window or Ladder editor screen is displayed.

An error message is displayed.

Touch the key.

No

No

An error message is displayed.

No

No

Yes

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation 139

14

perations for the security password input dialog box Displayed screen

The following table shows the displayed contents.

Key functions

No. Item Description 1) Password type Displays the type of the password to be input. (Device test password/Ladder editor password)

2) Password input area Set the password.

3) Keys Keys for operations in the security password input window.

Key Function [X] Closes the security password input window and cancels the password input operation.

[0-9] Switches the key type to the value.

[A-Z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).

[a-z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).

[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.

[Del] Deletes an input value or character.

[Enter] Verifies the password set in the password input area.

1) 2)

3)

3)

0 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation

4

User authentication function The user authentication function restricts the operation of the PLC CPU by an unauthenticated user. Only the safety CPU (RnSFCPU) is supported.

Specifications of the user authentication function Operations that requires the user authentication When the following operations are performed, the user authentication is required.

User authentication method For the user authentication, enter or specify the following items. User name Password Access level

Operations Connecting GX Works3 to the PLC CPU with the following methods: Connecting to the PLC CPU on the specify connection destination dialog Connecting to the PLC CPU with the one-touch ladder jump function Restarting the sequence program monitor (Ladder) or the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder)

Selecting a file in the file list of the PLC CPU

Reading a file from the PLC CPU

Writing a file to the PLC CPU

Touch [Recommend]

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation 141

14

Screen transition when the authentication function is used

Operations on the user authentication (PLC) window

No. Item Description 1) [User name] Enter a user name to be authenticated.

2) [Password] Enter a password.

3) [Access level] Select an access level.

4) Message display area Displays messages.

5) [Cancel] key Cancel the user authentication.

6) [OK] key Execute the user authentication on the entered contents.

Touch the [OK] key.

Enter or specify the user name, password, and access level.

User authentication

The authentication succeeds.

The GOT determines the necessity of user authentication.

The user authentication dialog is displayed.

The operation is performed.

Necessary

Touch the [] key.

The screen before the operation or the connection destination setting screen is displayed.

The operation that requires the user authentication is to be performed.

The authentication fails.

Not necessary

1)

2)

3)

4) 6)

5)

2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation

4

4.4 Setting Display Format On the sequence program monitor (ladder display) screen, you can change the display format of word device values, switch the display language, change the display mode of sequence programs, and so on.

Switching languages of sequence programs (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only) You can switch the display language (Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, or Korean) of the sequence program monitor (ladder display) at monitoring. For switching languages, comment files in the language to be displayed must be created in advance. Page 135 Sequence program monitor (Ladder) Page 137 Sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder) The following shows the relations between the language selected in the GOT utility and comment files with each character code.

Switching comment display mode For the sequence program monitor (ladder display), whether to display comments, statements, and notes is selectable on the ladder monitor screen or ladder editor screen. Page 154 Display menu Page 167 Display menu The display color of the device comment differs depending on the contact position. The following shows the display colors.

Language Comment file Japanese Comment files with SJIS code

Simplified Chinese Comment files with GB code

Traditional Chinese Comment files with Big5 code

Korean Comment files with KS code

Other than the above Comment files with ASCII code

Contact position Display color of the device comment Odd number line Light blue

Even number line Purple

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.4 Setting Display Format 143

14

4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen On the PLC read screen, the GOT reads sequence programs and comment files used for the sequence program monitor (ladder display). The following describes how to operate the PLC read screen.

Displayed contents This section explains the structure of the PLC read screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen after the sequence program monitor (ladder display) is started.

No. Item Description 1) PLC name Displays the label set in the PLC name setting for the target PLC CPU.

2) Target controller Displays CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the target PLC CPU.

3) Keys Keys for operations on the PLC read screen.

4) Target drive list (target controller) Displays the target PLC CPU model and the drives in a list. Selecting a drive displays files within the drive in the file list (target controller). For the drive that stores files selected in the file list (target controller), [*] is displayed to the left of the drive name.

5) File list (target controller) Displays the program types, file names, titles, sizes, dates, and times of all the files within the drive selected in the target drive list (target controller). (The date and time show those of updated files.) A file to be read can be selected from the file list. (The selected file is highlighted.) For program files, only sequence program files in the program memory can be selected. For selecting the file name selected in the file list (GOT), the file selection in the file list (GOT) is canceled. When a password is set for the selected file, the password input window appears. Page 145 Password input window

6) Target drive list (GOT) Displays the drive set for [Data save location] in the sequence program monitor settings. (Only the A drive (standard SD card) or B drive (USB drive) is available.) For the drive that stores files displayed in the file list (GOT), [*] is displayed to the left of the drive name.

7) File list (GOT) Displays the program types, file names, titles, sizes, dates, and times of all the files within the drive selected in the target drive list (GOT). (The date and time show those of updated files.) When the connection destination is an RCPU, the program files and comment files read from the RCPU are displayed only. Other files in the same drive are not displayed. A file to be read can be selected from the file list. (The selected file is highlighted.) For selecting the file name selected in the file list (target controller), the file selection in the file list (target controller) is canceled.

8) Total file size Displays the total data size of files selected in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT).

9) Number of selected files Displays the total number of files selected in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT).

10) Message display area Displays error messages and others.

1) 5) 2)

3)

3)

3)7)10)

8)

6)

4)

3)

9)

4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen

4

Password input window Displayed screen

The following table shows the displayed contents.

Key functions

No. Item Description 1) Password type Displays the type of the password to be input. (Program password, comment password, parameter

password, safety parameter password or FB/FUN password)

2) Password input area Set the password.

3) File name Displays the file name.

4) Keys Keys for operations in the password input window shown in (b)

No. Description [X] Closes the password input window and cancels the password input operation.

[0-9] Switches the key type to the value.

[Sign] Switches the key type to the symbol.

[A-Z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).

[a-z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).

[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.

[Del] Deletes an input value or character.

[Enter] Verifies the password set in the password input area. When the password verification for the first file is successful, the password verification for the other files is automatically executed with the same password.

1) 2)

(For alphabet input) (For numerical input)

3)

3)

4)

1) 2)

3)

3)

4)

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 145

14

Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys used for operating the PLC read screen.

Key Function [Back] Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the PLC read screen appears.

The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user-created monitor screen.

[Select CPU] Displays the communication setting window. Page 147 Communication setting window

[X] Exits the sequence program monitor (ladder) and returns the screen to the sequence program monitor (ladder) startup screen.

Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.

Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.

[Recommend] This key can be used when program files are displayed in the target drive list (connection destination). Touching the key selects all the sequence program files, common comment files, and comment files for the selected sequence program files in the file list (target controller). When files with the same name are displayed in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT), touching the key selects a file as shown below. For sequence program files

When the updated dates and times differ between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list (target controller). When the updated dates and times are the same between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list (GOT). For comment files

When the updated dates and times differ between the files, touching the key selects the latest file. When the updated dates and times are the same between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list (GOT). If you have stored files directly in the SEQCMNT folder in the data storage, all the files are selected.

[Proceed] Writes the file selected in the file list (target controller) into the data storage displayed in the target drive list (GOT). When the connection destination is an RCPU, data is read from the data storage. The file written into the data storage on the PLC read screen is stored in the SEQDAT folder. After writing, among files other than comment files in the data storage, files that are not selected in the file list (GOT) are deleted. Then, the program list window appears. If you have stored files directly in the SEQCMNT folder in the data storage, the files are not deleted. Page 148 Program list window

6 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen

4

Communication setting window Displayed screen

The following table shows the displayed contents.

Key functions

No. Item Description 1) CH No. input area Set the CH No. for the target controller.

2) Network No. input area Set the network No. for the target controller.

3) Station No. input area Set the station No. of the target controller. When the station No. is set to the host station (FF), set the network No. to 0.

4) CPU No. input area Set the CPU No.

5) CH No. selection key Select a CH No.

6) Keys Keys for operations in the communication setting window shown in (b). (Touch input)

Key Function [X] Closes the communication setting window.

When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is not set, the communication setting window does not close.

Moves the cursor among the input areas.

[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.

[Del] Deletes an input value or character.

[Enter] Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No. input area. When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station No. are completed, the communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.

1) 3) 4) 2) 1) 3) 4) 2)

5) 5)

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 147

14

Program list window Displaying the read sequence programs in a list is available.

Displayed screen

The following table shows the displayed contents.

*1 The execution status is not displayed when the CNC C80 is connected.

Key functions

No. Item Description 1) Sequence program file list Displays the file names and execution statuses of the read sequence programs.

The execution statuses show execution types set for the programs. *1

A touched sequence program file is highlighted. The execution status is not displayed when the FX5CPU is connected.

2) Keys Keys for operations in the program list window shown in (b). (Touch input)

Key Function [X] Closes the Program List window.

Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.

[Display] Displays the sequence program file selected in the sequence program file list on the Ladder monitor screen. Page 150 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen

2)1)

3)

8 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen

4

Display in the sequence program monitor In the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) (iQ-F ladder), whether the programs can be displayed depends on the status of the read source sequence program file.

*1 Touch [Proceed] in the [PLC Read] screen to display the following dialog.

*2 If a program is read from CNC C80, it cannot be displayed even if [Yes] is selected.

If all of the following conditions are satisfied, the program will not be displayed because the block password setting cannot be checked and thus whether the program file can be displayed is not determined correctly. No security key has been set for the function block file in the read source drive. No block passwords has been set for the function block in the read source drive. Multiple function blocks have been defined in the function block file. A function block is used in the function block file.

Status of the read source sequence program file Display in the sequence program monitorUse of function block or

function (except the standard function)

Use of security keys for the function block files and function files

Use of macro type function block files

Use of block passwords for the macro type function block files

Used Used Used/unused Used/unused Cannot be displayed

Used Unused Used Used Cannot be displayed

Used Unused Used Unused Whether the program can be displayed depends on the selection in the dialog shown below.*1

[Yes]: Can be displayed*2

[No]: Cannot be displayed

Used Unused Unused - Can be displayed

Unused - - - Can be displayed

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 149

15

4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen On the Ladder monitor screen, the GOT displays the read sequence program. The following describes how to operate the Ladder monitor screen.

Displayed contents The following describes the configuration of the Ladder monitor screen, menus and key functions on the screen.

No. Item Description 1) PLC name Displays the label set in the PLC name setting for the target PLC CPU.

2) Target controller Displays the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No of the target PLC CPU as shown below. CH No. network No.-station No./CPU No.

3) Program name Displays the file name of the displayed sequence program.

4) Number of steps Displays the number of steps for the displayed sequence program.

5) Keys Keys for operations on the Ladder monitor screen.

6) Ladder display area *1 Displays the read sequence program. By touching a device, it is selected and surrounded with a green frame. The following shows the conductive status

When contacts, coils, and outputs are the selection status, touching the area displays the device search window. Page 174 Device/Contact/Coil search Displaying the first step number When the Ladder registration monitor window is opened, the first step number of registerable ladder blocks is highlighted. Touching the area registers the specified ladder block in the window. (For the Factor mode, it is not registered even if it is touched.) Page 155 Ladder registration monitor window

7) Current device value display area Displays the current value of the displayed word device. Touch this area to change the display format. Page 151 Display format window

8) Message display area Displays error messages and others.

5)

7) 5)

8)

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 5)6)

Non-conductive status

Contact

Coil

Instruction*2

Conductive status

0 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen

4

*1 The following shows the numbers of rows and contacts that are displayable in the ladder display area.

*2 The conductive status of the following instructions is displayed only on the screen. SET, RST, PLS, PLF, SFT, SFTP, FF, DELTA, DELTAP, MC

Display format window

GOT When comments are displayed When comments are not displayed

Maximum number of displayed lines

Maximum number of displayed contacts

Maximum number of displayed lines

Maximum number of displayed contacts

GT27-X 6 11 13 11

GT27-S, GT25-S 4 11 9 11

GT27-V, GT25-V, GT25HS-V 3 11 7 11

Item Function [Data size] Select the data type of a device.

[16bit(W)] [32bit(D)] [64bit(L)]

Fixed to [16bit(W)] for the timer, counter, retentive timer, safety timer, safety counter, and safety retentive timer. Fixed to [32bit(D)] for the long timer, long counter, long retentive timer, and long index register.

[Data type] Select a display format of the device. [Signed decimal(K)] [Hexadecimal(HEX)] [Floating(EXP)] [Fixed(FIX)]

The selectable display formats depend on the data type. [16bit(W)]: [Signed decimal(K)], [Hexadecimal(HEX)] [32bit(D)]: [Signed decimal(K)], [Hexadecimal(HEX)], [Floating(EXP)], [Fixed(FIX)] [64bit(L)]: [Floating(EXP)], [Fixed(FIX)]

[Cancel] Closes the display format window without reflecting the settings.

[OK] Closes the display format window after reflecting the settings.

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen 151

15

Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys used for operating the Ladder monitor screen.

Key Function [Back] Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the Ladder monitor screen appears.

The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user-created monitor screen.

[Device test] Sets the device test mode. Touching the key in the device test mode cancels the device test mode. Page 180 Test Operation

[Edit] Displays the Edit menu. Touching [Start editing] displays the Ladder editor screen. Page 156 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen

[Find] Displays the Find menu. Page 153 Find menu

[Display] Displays the Display menu. Page 154 Display menu

[Monitoring mode] Displays the Monitoring Mode menu. Page 155 Monitoring Mode menu

The comment and note of the touched line can be displayed/hidden. If the touched line is the first line in the ladder block, the statement of the touched ladder block can be displayed/hidden.

Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.

Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.

2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen

4

Menus The following shows operations for the menus displayed on the Ladder monitor screen.

Edit menu

Find menu

Key Function Reference section [Start editing] Switches to the Ladder editor screen. Page 156 How to

Operate Ladder Editor Screen

Key Function Reference section [Jump] Displays the jump window. Page 166 Jump window

[Find device] Displays the device search window. Page 174 Device/ Contact/Coil search

[Find contact] Displays the device search window Page 174 Device/ Contact/Coil search

[Find coil] Displays the device search window Page 174 Device/ Contact/Coil search

[Factor search] Displays the Factor window. Page 176 Factor search

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen 153

15

Display menu

*1 Not supported by the sequence program monitor (Ladder).

Key Function Reference section [Hide comments] Hides the comments, statements or notes in the ladder display area. Page 143 Switching

comment display mode[Show comments] Displays the comments, statements or notes in the ladder display area.

[Comment change] Displays the comment file list window. Page 168 Comment file list window

[Change comment column] *1 Displays the change comment column window. Page 169 Change comment column window

[Device Monitor] Displays the window for the device monitor. Page 55 DEVICE MONITOR

[Ladder registration monitor] Displays the Ladder registration monitor window. Page 155 Ladder registration monitor window

[Delete all registered ladder] Deletes all registered ladder blocks in the Ladder registration monitor window. Page 155 Ladder registration monitor window

[Program list] Displays the program list window Page 148 Program list window

[PLC diagnosis] *1 Displays the PLC diagnosis screen. Page 172 PLC diagnosis window

[PLC read] Displays the PLC read screen. Page 144 How to Operate PLC Read Screen

4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen

4

Ladder registration monitor window Displaying or deleting the registered ladder blocks is available. Displayed screen The following table shows the displayed contents.

Key functions

Monitoring Mode menu

*1 Not supported by the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder).

Monitoring local devices When the GOT monitors local devices, the scan time increases. When local devices are displayed on the screen, touching the [local device monitor] key cancels the display of local

devices. When the Ladder monitor screen is switched to other screen, or the displayed program is switched to other program, the

GOT cancels the display of local devices.

No. Item Description 1) Ladder display area A ladder block selected on the Ladder monitor screen is added as the last registered ladder block on the

Ladder registration monitor window. Touching the first step number displays the dialog box to delete the ladder block. (For the Factor mode, it is not deleted even if it is touched.)

2) Keys Keys for operations in the Ladder registration monitor window shown in (b).

Item Description [X] Closes the Ladder registration monitor window.

Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.

Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.

Scrolls the display area right and left by one column.

Scrolls the display area right and left by one page.

Key Function Reference section Local device monitor *1 Displays local devices monitored by the GOT. Page 155 Monitoring

local devices

2)1)

2)

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen 155

15

4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen On the Ladder editor screen, editing sequence programs, finding devices, and displaying comments are available. The following describes how to operate the Ladder editor screen.

Displayed contents

Ladder editor screen The following describes the configuration of the Ladder editor screen, menus and key functions on the screen.

No. Item Description 1) PLC name Displays the label set in the PLC name setting for the target PLC CPU.

2) Target controller Displays the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the target PLC CPU as shown below. CH No. network No.-station No./CPU No.

3) Drive name Displays the drive of the controller for the displayed sequence program.

4) Program name Displays the file name of the displayed program.

5) Number of steps Displays the number of steps for the displayed sequence program.

6) Keys Keys for operations on the Ladder editor screen.

7) Ladder display area Displays the read sequence program as follows. By touching a contact, coil, statement, or note, the item is highlighted and the Ladder input window is displayed. Page 157 Enter ladder program window Touch [Show comments] from the [Display] menu to display the comments, statements or notes. Touch [Hide comments] from the [Display] menu to hide the comments, statements or notes. Displays the first step number of ladder blocks. Touching the first step number of ladder blocks highlights the touched position, and displays the Enter ladder program window. Page 157 Enter ladder program window Displays the device comment in the comment display mode. The display methods of the device comment are as follows. VGA: One-byte characters in 4-row and 8-column SVGA: One-byte characters in 4-row and 8-column XGA: One-byte characters in 4-row and 12-column

8) Message display area Displays error messages and others.

1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

6)

7) 6)

8)

6 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen

4

Displaying the Ladder editor screen when setting the security By setting the security on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), the display of the Ladder editor screen can be limited. For the security setting, refer to the following. Page 139 Setting the security

Enter ladder program window Editing sequence programs is available. Displayed screen The following table shows the displayed contents.

Types of statements and notes that can be entered Statements and notes that can be entered are integrated statements and notes. Peripheral statements and notes cannot be entered. (If the * is entered at the start of statements and notes, an error occurs.)

No. Item Description 1) Ladder symbol display area Displays the ladder symbol selected in the ladder display area.

2) Text display area Displays devices, sequence programs, statements, and notes selected in the Ladder symbol display area. The cursor is displayed at the position to be input. The cursor can be moved with the touch operation. If devices, sequence programs, statements, and notes are not fully displayed in the display area, move the cursor to the border of the side where the display was cut, and touch the cursor to scroll the displayed contents. Only one-byte alphanumeric characters can be input for statements and notes. If characters other than one-byte alphanumeric characters input on GX Works2/GX Developer are deleted on the GOT, they cannot be input again.

3) Keys Keys for operations in the Enter ladder program window shown in (b).

1)

1)

3)

3)

3)

(Reduced size)

2)

2)

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 157

15

Key functions

Key Function [X] Closes the Enter ladder program window. The displayed contents are not reflected.

Touch the key to input a normally open contact.

Touch the key to input a normally closed contact.

Touch the key to input a leading edge pulse.

Touch the key to input a trailing edge pulse.

Touch the key to input a leading edge pulse rejection.

Touch the key to input a trailing edge rejection.

Touch the key to input a conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse.

Touch the key to input a conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse.

Touch the key to input a coil.

Touch the key to input an application instruction.

Touch the key to input a vertical line.

Touch the key to delete a vertical line.

Touch the key to input a horizontal line.

Touch the key to delete a ladder.

[Insert row] Inserts one row in the specified position.

[Delete row] Deletes the specified row.

[Insert column] Inserts one column in the specified position.

[Delete column] Deletes the specified column.

[ENT] Reflects the displayed contents, and closes the Enter ladder program window.

Reduces the size of the Enter ladder program window.

Changes the Enter ladder program window from the reduced size to the default size.

[Cap] Switches the alphabetic characters between the uppercase and the lowercase.

8 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen

4

Inputting or deleting ladders Inputting contacts or instructions (Operation example: Inputting a contact (X0))

1. Touch a position to input a contact (X0).

2. The Enter ladder program window appears.

3. Touch the key. The ladder symbol corresponding to the touched key is displayed on the ladder symbol display area. Input X0 in the text display area, and touch the [ENT] key.

4. The contact (X0) is input.

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 159

16

Deleting contacts or instructions (Operation example: Deleting a contact (X0))

1. Touch a contact (X0) to be deleted.

2. The Enter ladder program window appears.

3. Touch the [X] key. Touch the end position of the contact (X0).

4. The contact (X0) is deleted.

Touch an end position.

0 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen

4

Inputting vertical lines or horizontal lines (Operation example: Inputting a vertical line)

1. Touch a position to input a vertical line.

2. The Enter ladder program window appears.

3. Touch the key. Touch the end position to input the vertical line.

4. The vertical line is input.

Touch an end position.

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 161

16

Deleting vertical lines or horizontal lines (Operation example: Deleting a vertical line)

1. Touch a position to delete a vertical line.

2. The Enter ladder program window appears.

3. Touch key. Touch the end position to delete the vertical line.

4. The vertical line is deleted.

Touch an end position.

2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen

4

Inputting rows and columns (Operation example: Inputting a row)

1. Touch a position to insert a row.

2. The Enter ladder program window appears.

3. Touch the [Insert row] key. The Enter ladder program window is closed, and the row is inserted.

Deleting rows and columns (Operation example: Deleting a row)

1. Touch a position to delete a row.

2. The Enter ladder program window appears.

3. Touch the [Delete row] key. The Enter ladder program window is closed, and the row is deleted.

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 163

16

Key functions The following shows the functions of keys used for operating the Ladder editor screen.

Menus The following shows operations for the menus displayed on the Ladder editor screen.

Edit menu

*1 Not supported by the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder).

Key Function [Back] Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the Ladder editor screen appears.

The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user-created monitor screen.

[Edit] Displays the Edit menu. Page 164 Edit menu

[Find/Replace] Displays the Find/Replace menu. When the Find/Replace menu is displayed, touching the key closes the menu. Page 166 Find/Replace menu (only for the sequence program monitor (Ladder))

[Convert] Displays the Convert menu. Page 167 Convert menu

[Display] Displays the Display menu. Page 167 Display menu

[Online] Displays the Online menu. Page 170 Online menu

[X] Exits the sequence program monitor (ladder display) and returns the screen to the sequence program monitor (ladder display) startup screen.

The comment and note of the touched line can be displayed/hidden. If the touched line is the first line in the ladder block, the statement of the touched ladder block can be displayed/hidden.

Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.

Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.

Key Function Reference section [Undo] *1 Undoes the last edit operation.

The GOT can be returned to the state right after the last but one conversion, write during RUN, Replace Device or Change open/close contact.

-

[Redo] *1 Redoes the operation which was undone using the [Undo] key. -

[Restore program to the state after conversion]

Restores the edited ladder to the state just after conversion. -

[Check program] *1 Executes the program check to check if programs have consistency or double coils do not exist.

-

4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen

4

Deleting ladders which are not converted When deleting ladders which are not converted, a dialog box is displayed. When touching the [OK] button in the dialog box, the ladders which are not converted are deleted, as well as the operation history. Therefore, the [Undo] and [Redo] keys do not operate. Also, touch the [Cancel] button to return to the previous screen.

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 165

16

Find/Replace menu (only for the sequence program monitor (Ladder))

Jump window

Displayed contents

Key functions

Key Function Reference section [Jump] Displays the jump window. Page 166 Jump window

[Find device] Displays the device search window. Page 174 Device/Contact/Coil search

[Find contact] Displays the device search window. Page 174 Device/Contact/Coil search

[Find coil] Displays the device search window. Page 174 Device/Contact/Coil search

[Replace device] Displays the replace device window. Page 178 Replace device (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only)

[Change open/close contact] Displays the change open/close contact window. Page 179 Change open/close cantact (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only)

No. Item Description 1) Jump destination step number input

area Displays the input step number.

2) Keys Keys for operations in the jump window shown in (b). (Touch input)

Key Function [X] Closes the jump window.

[Enter] Displays a row that includes the input step number on the center of the ladder display area.

[Del] Deletes an input value or character.

[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.

2)

2)

1)

6 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen

4

Convert menu

*1 Not supported by the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder).

Precautions for the online change For the precautions for the online change, refer to the following. Page 124 Precautions Instruction Manual of the controller to use

Display menu

*1 Not supported by the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder). *2 Not supported by the sequence program monitor (Ladder).

Key Function Reference section [Convert] Convert the editing program to the execution program. -

[Convert (Online change)] *1 Convert the editing program to the execution program and execute the online change to controllers.

-

Key Function Reference section [Hide comments] Hides the comments, statements or notes in the ladder display area. Page 124 Precautions

[Show comments] Displays the comments, statements or notes in the ladder display area.

[Comment change] Displays the comment file list window. Page 168 Comment file list window

[Switch comment column] *2 Displays the change comment column window. Page 169 Change comment column window

[Program list] Displays the program list window Page 148 Program list window

[PLC diagnosis] *1 Displays the PLC diagnosis screen. Page 172 PLC diagnosis window

[PLC read] Displays the PLC read screen. Page 144 How to Operate PLC Read Screen

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 167

16

Comment file list window The GOT displays the comment file list. For the sequence program monitor (Ladder)

For the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder)

No. Item Description 1) Comment file list Among comment files stored in the data storage, the file names and titles of the comment files, and

common comment files used for the displayed sequence program are displayed. For switching comments, select a comment file to be used. A selected comment file is highlighted.

2) [X] Closes the Comment file list window.

3) Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.

4) [Apply changes] Closes the Comment file list window and displays the ladder display area with the comments of the file selected from the comment file list.

No. Item Description 1) Comment file list Among comment files stored in the data storage, the file names and titles of the comment files, and

common comment files used for the displayed sequence program are displayed. For switching comments, select a comment file to be used. A selected comment file is highlighted.

2) Message display area Displays messages.

3) [Cancel] Closes the Comment file list window.

4) Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.

5) [Changes] Closes the Comment file list window and displays the ladder display area with the comments of the file selected from the comment file list.

2)

1)

4)

3)

3)

1)

5)

4)

4)

2)

8 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen

4

Change comment column window The GOT displays the comment column list of the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder).

Comment title When the comment titles displayed on the comment column list cannot be acquired, the numbers of the comment columns are displayed.

No. Item Description 1) Comment column list Displays the comment titles of the multiple comments display setting of GX Works3.

To change the comment columns, select the comment column to use. Only one comment column can be selected.

2) Message display area Displays messages.

3) [Cancel] Closes the change comment column window.

4) [OK] Closes the change comment column window, and displays the ladder display area with the comment column selected on the comment column list.

3)

1)

4)2)

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 169

17

Online menu

*1 Not supported by the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder).

Key Function Reference section [PLC read] Displays the PLC read screen. Page 144 How to

Operate PLC Read Screen

[Write to PLC] Checks the edited sequence program, and writes the program into the PLC CPU. Set the PLC CPU to the STOP status, and write the program into the PLC CPU. To execute the online change, execute it using the [Convert (Online change)] in the [Convert] menu. Page 167 Convert menu

-

[Verify with PLC] *1 Verifies the sequence program displayed on the ladder display area and the program in the PLC CPU. If the programs do not match, the Verify result window is displayed.

Page 171 Verify result window

[PLC diagnosis] *1 Displays the PLC diagnosis screen. Page 172 PLC diagnosis window

[Remote operation] *1 Displays the Remote operation window. Page 173 Remote operation window

[Write the program memory to ROM] *1 Displays the Copy program memory data into ROM window. Page 173 Copy program memory data into ROM window

[Start monitor] Displays the Ladder monitor screen. Page 150 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen

0 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen

4

Verify result window Displaying the result of the program verification with the PLC is available. Displayed screen The following table shows the displayed contents.

Key functions

No. Item Description 1) Verification result display area Displays the unmatched items.

Up to 100 items are displayed. The program verification is stopped when unmatched items are more than 100.

2) Program name display area Displays the file name of the verified program.

3) Unmatched item count display area Displays the number of unmatched items displayed on the Verify result window.

4) Keys Keys for operations in the Verify result window shown in (b). (Touch input)

Key Function [X] Closes the Verify result window.

Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.

2)

4)1)

3)

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 171

17

PLC diagnosis window Displays the PLC diagnosis screen. Displayed screen The following table shows the displayed contents.

Key functions

No. Item Description 1) Error No. Displays the error number of the destination PLC found by PLC diagnosis.

Displays [No errors exist.] when no error occurs.

2) Error contents Displays the message corresponding to the error number of the destination PLC.

3) Occurrence date and time Displays the error occurrence date and time when an error occurs in the destination PLC.

4) Program name Displays the program name when the error in the destination PLC is a program error. If the error is not a program error, [----] is displayed.

5) Step No. Displays the sequence step number highlighted in yellow when the error in the destination PLC is a program error. By touching the sequence step number where an error occurs, the PLC diagnosis dialog box will be closed and the screen will be switched to the ladder display. The screen jumps to sequence step number where the error occurs and the area of error is highlighted in a red rectangle. If the error is not a program error, [----] is displayed.

Key Function [X] Closes the PLC diagnosis window.

2)

4)

1)

3)

5)

2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen

4

Remote operation window Changing the operation status of the PLC CPU by using the remote operation is available. Displayed screen The following table shows the displayed contents.

Copy program memory data into ROM window Writing data in the program memory into a ROM is available. Displayed screen The following table shows the displayed contents.

No. Item Description 1) Operation Select an operation (RUN or STOP key), and touch the [Execute] key.

RUN: The PLC CPU becomes the remote RUN status. STOP: The PLC CPU becomes the remote STOP status.

2) STOP RUN operation Set the status of devices and signals when executing the remote RUN. Device memory Do not clear: The PLC CPU operates device values prior to the remote STOP. Clear all except latch: Clears all device values to zero except the latched devices. Clear all: Clears all device values to zero.

Signal flow Save: Keeps signals prior to the remote STOP, and outputs the signals. Turn OFF: Turns off the signal. Turn ON: Turns on the signal.

3) [Execute] Executes the remote RUN or STOP.

No. Item Description 1) Target Touch the target ROM.

Standard ROM: Set the standard ROM in the PLC CPU as the target. IC card (ROM): Set the IC memory card (Flash card) inserted in the PLC CPU as the target.

2) [Execute] Touching the key writes data in the program memory into the target ROM.

3)

1)

2)

2)

1)

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 173

17

4.8 Find/Replace Operation Device/Contact/Coil search Ladder blocks including the set devices are searched. They can be searched continuously in multiple sequence program files.

1. Execute any of the following operations to display the device search window. Touch the [Find] [Find device]/[Find contact]/[Find coil] menu on the Ladder monitor screen. Touch the [Find/Replace] [Find device]/[Find contact]/[Find coil] menu on the Ladder editor screen.

2. Set a device to be searched and touch the / /[Enter] key Displayed screen

Key functions

No. Item Description 1) Device input area Set a device to be searched.

The device can be input also by selecting a device on the ladder monitor screen, ladder editor screen, Ladder registration monitor window.

2) Keys Keys for operations in the device search window shown in (b).

Key Function [X] Closes the device search window.

[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.

[Del] Deletes an input value or character.

[0-9] Switches the key type to the value.

[A-Z] Switches the key type to the alphabet.

Searches the input device in descending order of the step number.

Searches the input device in ascending order of the step number. If the device is selected on the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder editor screen, the search starts from the selected device.

[Enter] Searches the input device in ascending order of the step number. If the device is selected on the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder editor screen, the search starts from the selected device. However, the search starts always from the start of the program in the following conditions. When searching for the first time after the device search window is displayed. When starting to search consecutively after searching

1)

2)

(For alphabet input) (For numerical input)

1)

2)

4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.8 Find/Replace Operation

4

3. The ladder block which has the searched device is displayed and the device is surrounded with a green frame.

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.8 Find/Replace Operation 175

17

Factor search The contact point that affected the set device status (ON/OFF) is searched backwards in ladder blocks.

1. Touch the [Find] [Factor] menu from the Ladder monitor screen to display the factor search window.

2. Set a device to be searched, and touch the [Enter] key Displayed screen

Key functions

The following shows the target instructions and coils for Factor search.

No. Item Description 1) Device input area Set a device to be searched.

Bit device words cannot be specified. Also, by selecting a device on the Ladder monitor screen, the device can be input.

2) Keys Keys for operations in Factor search window.

Key Function [X] Closes the Factor search window.

[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.

[Del] Deletes an input value or character.

[0-9] Switches the key type to the value.

[A-Z] Switches the key type to the alphabet.

[Enter] By touching the key, the Factor search window is closed and the Ladder registration monitor window is displayed. The search starts from the last step. If the device is selected on the Ladder monitor screen, the search starts from the selected device. When the search is executed, ladder blocks registered in the Ladder registration monitor window are deleted.

Instruction, coil Target of the search operation Instruction LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI

Coil OUT, OUTH

1)

2)

1)

2)

(For alphabet input) (For numerical input)

6 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.8 Find/Replace Operation

4

3. The Factor search window is closed and the Ladder registration monitor window is displayed. The sequence programs displayed on the ladder monitor screen are searched. Then, the factor ladder blocks for the set device are registered in order. The ladder blocks newly registered are always displayed in the Ladder monitor window during the factor search. The factor devices are highlighted.

For the Ladder registration monitor window, refer to the following. Page 155 Ladder registration monitor window

4. The message [Factor search is completed.] is displayed in the message area when the search is completed. When closing the Ladder registration monitor window, the factor search mode is released.

Cancellation of the factor search When there are multiple factor contacts The message [Factor search was aborted because there were multiple factor contact points.] is displayed in the message area on the ladder monitor screen. When continuing the factor search based on the interrupted result, execute the factor search based on one of the found contacts. When the ladder blocks registered in the Ladder registration monitor window exceed 100 The message [Factor search was aborted because the number of ladder blocks exceeded 100.] is displayed in the message area on the ladder monitor screen. When restarting the factor search, proceed the factor search based on the contact of the 100th ladder block.

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.8 Find/Replace Operation 177

17

Replace device (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only) The device replacement is available only in the sequence program monitor (Ladder).

1. Touch the [Find/Replace] [Replace device] menu on the Ladder editor screen to display the Replace device window.

2. Set the current device and new device, and touch the [Enter] key. Displayed screen

Key functions

3. All the old devices in the sequence programs displayed on the Ladder editor screen are replaced with new devices.

No. Item Description 1) Current device display area Set a current device.

The device can be input also by selecting a device on the Ladder editor screen.

2) New device display area Set a new device. The device can be input also by selecting a device on the Ladder editor screen.

3) Keys Displays the keys used in the operation in the Replace device window.

Key Function [X] Closes the Replace device window.

Touching the key after inputting a current device moves the cursor to the new device display area.

[0-9] Switches the key type to the value.

[A-Z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).

[a-z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).

[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.

[Del] Deletes an input value or character.

[Enter] Replaces the current device to the new device.

1) 2)

1) 2)

3)

(For alphabet input) (For numerical input)

3)

8 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.8 Find/Replace Operation

4

Change open/close cantact (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only) The normally open/close contact switching is supported by the sequence program monitor (Ladder).

1. Touch the [Find/Replace] [Change open/close cantact] menu on the Ladder editor screen to display the Change open/ close cantact window.

2. Set the device to change the contact and touch the [Enter] key. Displayed screen

Key functions

3. The contacts of devices in the sequence program displayed in the Ladder editor screen are changed from A to B or B to A.

No. Item Description 1) Device input area Set a device for changing a normally open contact or a normally closed contact.

The item can be set also by selecting in the ladder editor screen.

2) Keys Displays the keys used in the operation in the Change open/close cantact window.

Key Function [X] Closes the Change open/close cantact window.

[0-9] Switches the key type to the value.

[A-Z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).

[a-z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).

[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.

[Del] Deletes an input value or character.

[Enter] Changes a normally open contact or a normally closed contact.

1) 1)

2) 2)

(For alphabet input) (For numerical input)

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.8 Find/Replace Operation 179

18

4.9 Test Operation In the device test mode, device values can be changed on the screen. For setting the device test mode, refer to the following. Page 152 Key functions The test operation of devices is available by touching devices on the following screens in the device test mode.

Displaying the device test window when setting the security By setting the security on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), the display of the device test window can be limited. For the security setting, refer to the following. Page 139 Setting the security

Touching a device displays the device test window. When touching bit devices A bit device is switched between ON and OFF states in the device test window. When touching word devices The GOT writes the value input in the device test window into the selected word device.

How to operate device test window

Bit devices Displayed screen

The following table shows the displayed contents.

Key functions

Screen applicable to device test mode Reference section Ladder monitor screen Page 152 Key functions

No. Item Description 1) Device Displays the selected device.

2) Keys Keys for operations in the device test window shown in (b).

Key Function [X] Closes the device test window.

[ON] Turns on the bit device and writes the device state to the PLC CPU.

[OFF] Turns off the bit device and writes the device state to the PLC CPU.

1)

2)

2)

0 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.9 Test Operation

4

Word devices Displayed screen

The following table shows the displayed contents.

Key functions

No. Item Description 1) Device Displays the selected device.

2) Device value input area Set the value to be written into the selected device.

3) Input mode Displays the current input mode. (DEC: decimal number. HEX: hexadecimal number)

4) Keys Keys for operations in the device test window shown in (b).

Key Function [X] Closes the device test window.

[DEC/HEX] Switches the input modes. (DEC, HEX)

[Enter] Writes the value input in the device value input area into the PLC CPU.

[Del] Deletes an input value or character.

[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.

1) 2) 3)

4)

1) 2) 3)

4)

(Monitoring mode : 16-bit integer (DEC)) (Monitoring mode : 32-bit integer (HEX))

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.9 Test Operation 181

18

4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action This section explains the error messages displayed when the sequence program monitor (ladder display) is executed, and the corrective actions.

Error messages for data-storing destination access Error message Description Corrective action File access error. Please check the [drive name] drive.

No data storage is inserted in the GOT. The SD card cover is opened. A data storage with a format error is

inserted in the GOT. The data storage has insufficient free space

for writing a file. The folder for the sequence program

monitor (ladder display) in the data storage is write-protected.

Insert a data storage without a format error in the GOT. Close the SD card cover. Delete files in the data storage. Insert a data storage with a large capacity. Cancel the write-protect setting for the folder that is used for

the sequence program monitor (ladder display) in the data storage.

Failed to write the (file name) to the [drive name] drive. Please check the [drive name] drive.

No data storage is inserted in the GOT. The SD card cover is opened. A data storage with a format error is

inserted in the GOT. The data storage has insufficient free space

for writing a file. The folder for the sequence program

monitor (ladder display) in the data storage is write-protected.

Insert a data storage without a format error in the GOT. Close the SD card cover. Delete files in the data storage. Insert a data storage with a large capacity. Cancel the write-protect setting for the folder that is used for

the sequence program monitor (ladder display) in the data storage.

The [drive name] drive has insufficient free space. The file cannot be saved.

The data storage has insufficient free space for writing a file.

Delete files in the data storage. Insert a data storage with a large capacity.

The file (file name) is broken. The file is unselected.

The read file in the data storage is corrupted. Read the file from the PLC CPU again.

The file (file name) is broken. Perform PLC Read and read the file again.

The temporary file used on the Ladder editor screen or the Ladder monitor screen in the data storage is corrupted.

The writing of files into data storage is failed due to an insufficient capacity of data storage.

Read the file from the PLC CPU again. Delete unnecessary files in the data storage. Or insert a data

storage with a larger free space.

The file (file name) is broken. Please read the file in the program list again.

The temporary file used on the Ladder editor screen or the Ladder monitor screen in the data storage is corrupted.

Select the program displayed in the Program list window again.

The file (file name) is broken. When searching for devices in an undisplayed program, a file in the data storage is corrupted.

Read the file from the PLC CPU again.

Failed to check program. Please check the [drive name] drive.

The GOT cannot access the temporary file in the data storage during a program check.

Insert a data storage without a format error in the GOT. Close the SD card cover. Delete files in the data storage. Insert a data storage with a large capacity. Cancel the write-protect setting for the folder that is used for

the sequence program monitor (ladder display) in the data storage.

Failed to verify with PLC. Please check the [drive name] drive.

The GOT cannot access the temporary file in the data storage during the PLC program verification.

Insert a data storage without a format error in the GOT. Close the SD card cover. Delete files in the data storage. Insert a data storage with a large capacity. Cancel the write-protect setting for the folder that is used for

the sequence program monitor (ladder display) in the data storage.

Parameter file is corrupted. Please restart the ladder editor.

The parameter file in the data storage is corrupted.

Exit the sequence program monitor (ladder display), and then start the function again.

2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action

4

Error messages for communication Error message Description Corrective action Failed to communicate with CPU. The GOT cannot communicate with the PLC

CPU. Check the line status between the GOT and the PLC CPU,

and make the GOT communicate with the PLC CPU. Check if the PLC CPU supports the sequence program

monitor (ladder display).

Failed to communicate with CPU. The GOT cannot communicate with the PLC CPU.

Check the line status between the GOT and the PLC CPU, and make the GOT communicate with the PLC CPU.

Check if the PLC CPU supports the sequence program monitor (ladder display).

Failed to get the information of CPU because of bad connection.

The GOT cannot communicate with the PLC CPU.

Check the line status between the GOT and the PLC CPU, and make the GOT communicate with the PLC CPU.

Failed to get the information. The GOT cannot communicate with the PLC CPU.

A file with faulty file name is selected.

Check the communications between the GOT and PLC CPU, and make sure that the GOT communicates with the PLC CPU.

Select the file after changing the message display language to one which can display the file name in the utility.

Change the file name with GX Works2/GX Developer.

The CPU protect switch is ON. Turn OFF the protect switch.

The system protect switch of the PLC CPU is on.

The PLC CPU is in the boot process.

Turn off the system protect switch of the PLC CPU. Wait until the boot process of the PLC CPU is completed.

The CPU is not in STOP mode. Please change the CPU to STOP mode.

Any operation that the PLC CPU cannot execute during running is performed.

Set the PLC CPU to the STOP status.

CPU drive error. Please confirm the drive status.

The target drive does not function. Format the target drive by using GX Works2/GX Developer.

The specified file does not exist in the CPU. Please confirm the file in the drive.

The specified file does not exist in the PLC CPU.

Check files in the specified drive of the PLC CPU.

The specified file in the CPU is invalid. Please confirm the file in the drive.

The specified file in the PLC CPU is corrupted.

Delete the specified file by using GX Works2/GX Developer, and then create the file again.

The file cannot be accessed while it is being accessed by other connected equipment or it is being transferred.

Other GOTs or GX Works2/GX Developer access the connected PLC CPU.

The QCPU transfers program files from the program cache memory to the program memory.

Access the file when other devices do not access the connected PLC CPU.

Access the file after QCPU completes the transference from the program cache memory to the program memory.

The data cannot be written to the specified CPU because the total data size may exceed the drive capacity.

The specified drive of the PLC CPU runs out of space.

Reduce the capacity of the file to be written.

The specified file is invalid. The specified file in the PLC CPU is corrupted.

Format the target drive by using GX Works2/GX Developer, and then write the specified file.

There is no consecutive free space in the drive of the specified CPU. Please clean up the drive.

The specified drive of the PLC CPU does not have consecutive free space.

Execute [Arrange PLC memory] with GX Works2/GX Developer.

Failed to write data to the specified CPU. Please check if the target flash ROM has an error or not.

An error occurs when writing/deleting data to/ from the specified drive of the PLC CPU.

Check the specified drive by using GX Works2/GX Developer.

The specified file does not exist. The specified drive or file does not exist in the PLC CPU.

Read data from the PLC, and check if the specified drive exists.

The specified CPU drive has an error. Please check the drive.

The specified drive of the PLC CPU is faulty. Execute [Format PLC memory] with GX Works2/GX Developer.

If the specified drive is the flash ROM, write data to the PLC (flash ROM) again.

The specified file is under processing. The specified drive of the PLC CPU is in use. Execute the same operation later.

Invalid password. The password to access the specified file is incorrect.

Input the correct password.

The specified CPU drive is write- protected.

Data is written to the write-protect drive of the PLC CPU.

Cancel the write-protect setting for the specified drive of the PLC CPU.

Too many files are being accessed at the same time.

Other devices are accessing too many files in the PLC CPU at the same time.

Reduce the number of files being accessed by other devices.

The specified CPU drive cannot be accessed.

The specified drive does not exist in the PLC CPU.

Read data from the PLC, and specify a drive that exists in the PLC CPU.

Failed to access the specified CPU drive. Please check the drive status.

No memory card is inserted in the specified drive of the PLC CPU.

The memory card is faulty.

Insert a memory card in the specified drive of the PLC CPU. Format the memory card in the specified drive by using GX

Works2/GX Developer.

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action 183

18

The specified CPU drive has an error. Please check the drive status.

The specified drive in the PLC CPU does not function.

Format the specified drive by using GX Works2/GX Developer.

The specified CPU drive is not formatted. The specified drive of the PLC CPU is not formatted.

Format the specified drive by using GX Works2/GX Developer.

CPU memory card is not inserted. No memory card is inserted in the specified drive of the PLC CPU.

Insert a memory card in the specified drive.

The type of the CPU memory card is wrong. Please check the memory card.

An unsupported memory card is inserted in the specified drive of the PLC CPU.

No memory card is inserted in the specified drive of the PLC CPU.

The program memory of QnUDVCPU is written to the ROM.

Insert a supported memory card in the specified drive. The program memory of QnUDVCPU cannot be written to the

ROM.

The CPU is write protected. Please remove the protection.

The PLC CPU is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect setting for the PLC CPU.

The specified CPU drive cannot be used. Please check the drive.

The specified drive of the PLC CPU does not exist.

Read data from the PLC, and check if the specified drive exists.

PLC types of the program (file name) and the connected PLC are not the same. Perform PLC Read and read the data again.

The PLC CPU type of the program file stored in the data storage differs from the connected PLC CPU type.

Read a program file that exists in the PLC CPU.

The program before modification on the GOT and the program being registered on the CPU do not match. Please perform PLC Read and read the program again.

When a program is written into the PLC, the target file does not exist in the PLC CPU, or the type of the program differs from that of the target file.

Read a program file that exists in the PLC CPU

Failed to write the value to the device. The GOT cannot write device values to the PLC CPU with the device test.

Read the program being displayed from the PLC again.

Parameter file is corrupted. The ladder editor cannot be used.

The GOT cannot read parameters from the PLC CPU.

Write the parameters to the PLC CPU by using GX Works2/GX Developer.

The file has invalid date or timestamp. Please check the GOT clock data.

The date of the GOT is wrong. PC writing or online change is executed to

Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, or Q01CPU when the date of the GOT is Feb. 29th.

Set the date of the GOT properly. When executing PC writing or online change to the Q00JCPU,

Q00CPU, or Q01CPU, set the date of the GOT other than Feb. 29th.

Communication of the online debug function failed.

Communication of the online debug function failed.

Execute after registering the online debug function (online change, trace, monitor with conditions, etc.) in GX Works2/GX Developer.

Execute after confirming the communication path such as communication cables.

Specified contents of the online debug function are invalid.

Specified contents of the online debug function are invalid.

Execute after registering the online debug function (online change, trace, monitor with conditions, etc.) in GX Works2/GX Developer.

Execute after confirming the communication path such as communication cables.

An error occurred when verifying the specified program and the program in the CPU. Please read the file again.

The sequence program after modification of the online change operation differs from the program before modification.

Execute the online change after executing PLC read to equalize the sequence program of the GOT and PLC CPU by PLC read.

END instruction cannot be written to a CPU module while the module is running.

The END instruction is inserted or deleted by the online change.

Check the contents of the specified sequence program file. Write the program after setting the PLC CPU to the stop

status.

Reserved area for online change is insufficient. Online change cannot be performed.

The file capacity is exceeded by the online change.

Check the capacity of the specified sequence program file. Write the program after setting the PLC CPU to the stop

status.

There are instructions that cannot be handled in the CPU.

An instruction, which is not compatible with the CPU type set in the project, exists in the sequence program executing the online change.

Check if the PLC CPU type is correct. Check the sequence program and delete the invalid

instruction.

The step to be written is invalid. The step to be written is invalid. The start position of the online change was

not specified with a correct program step No.

Write the program after setting the PLC CPU to the stop status.

Check if the GX Works2/GX Developer is compatible with the CPU type and CPU version set in the project.

The instruction that was written during online change is invalid.

The instruction of the online change is wrong. Execute the online change again. Write the program after setting the PLC CPU to the stop

status.

Error message Description Corrective action

4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action

4

Error messages for editing

The number of blocks to be written by online change is invalid.

Block size error (The number of the online change is invalid.)

Check the number of the block for the online change.

The specified file is too large to read. A program file exceeding 260k steps was read.

Split the program to sections within 260k steps.

The parameter file cannot be read. The ladder editor function cannot be used.

No parameter file exists. Write the parameter file using the peripheral software of the PLC CPU.

The function is not supported by the specified CPU version.

The function that is not supported by the specified PLC CPU is used.

The program memory of QnUDVCPU is written to the ROM.

The executed function cannot be used.

The specified file can not be accessed. The specified file is protected with a security key.

The specified file is protected with a block password.

The executed function cannot be used. Delete programs from the PLC CPU, initialize the memory, and then write the project data again.

Please wait for a while and execute again. A password to access the specified file is incorrectly iput for the specified times, the PLC CPU locks out the access.

Wait for a while, and input the correct password.

The program (file name) is not supported by the sequence program monitor.

A program that includes instructions or labels unsupported by the sequence program monitor is read.

A file that includes the output instruction that uses any label of the timer, retentive timer, counter, long timer, long retentive timer, or long counter is specified.

Input the correct instruction. Modify the program so that unsupported labels will not be

used.

Error message Description Corrective action The instruction is incorrect. The input instruction is incorrect.

The instruction inapplicable to the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) has been input.

The instruction unavailable for the RCPU is input.

Input the correct instruction. Edit the program with the MELSOFT application supported by

the PLC CPU, and write it to the PLC CPU.

The specified device is not available. The input device name is incorrect. Input the correct device name.

The device number is out of range. The device number outside the range is input. Input the correct device number.

Too many rows are being edited. Data cannot be entered.

On the edited ladder, 49 or more rows are input.

Delete rows to be 48 or less per edited ladder.

The ladder block is too large. Data cannot be entered.

On a ladder block, 25 or more rows are input. Delete rows to be 24 or less per ladder block.

The edit position is incorrect. A specified position is incorrect to input a ladder.

A space of a specified position is too narrow to input a ladder.

A start position and end position are not specified in the same column to input a vertical line.

An end position is specified in an upper row of the start position to input a vertical line.

A start position and end position are not specified in the same row to input a horizontal line.

A start position and end position are not specified in the same row to delete a ladder.

Input a ladder in a correct position. Insert columns, and then input a ladder. Specify a correct end position for a vertical line or horizontal

line, and then input the line. Specify a correct end position, and then delete a ladder.

The data being edited is too large. Too many ladders are not converted. The data cannot be converted.

Reduce the ladders which are not converted before conversion.

Line statements exist in the ladder program and the data cannot be edited. Please delete the line statements from the ladder program.

A vertical line that overlaps an interlinear statement is input.

Delete the interlinear statement, and then input a vertical line.

PI devices exist in the ladder program and the data cannot be edited. Please delete the PI devices from the ladder program.

A vertical line that overlaps a pointer or interrupt pointer is input.

Delete the pointer or interrupt pointer, and then input a vertical line.

Error message Description Corrective action

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action 185

18

Error messages for conversion

There is a ladder block which cannot be displayed in the ladder program. Data cannot be edited.

On a ladder block, 25 or more rows are edited.

An incomplete ladder block is edited.

Edit the ladder block in 24 rows or less by using GX Works2/ GX Developer, and then write the program into the PLC CPU.

Write the program into the PLC CPU by using GX Works2/GX Developer again because the program may be corrupted.

Statements should be 64 characters or less.

A statement with 65 characters or more was entered.

Enter statements with 64 characters or less.

Notes should be 32 characters or less. A note with 33 characters or more was entered.

Enter notes with 32 characters or less.

Conversion (online change) failed due to communication error.

The GOT fails to communicate with the PLC during conversion (online change).

Check the communication setting. Check cables. Verify with PLC. Operate the GOT for reading the program from the PLC.

Peripheral statements cannot be entered. A peripheral statement was entered. Delete the peripheral statement.

Peripheral notes cannot be entered. A peripheral note was entered. Delete the peripheral note.

Cannot edit because NOP is in selected range.

A ladder block in the edit area including NOP was edited.

Exclude NOP from the edit area. Delete NOP with the MELSOFT application, and write the

program to the PLC CPU.

Unusable command is specified. The instruction inapplicable to the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) has been input.

The instruction unavailable for the RCPU is input.

Edit the program with the MELSOFT application, and write it to the PLC CPU.

The program is not editable. The following programs, which cannot be edited, were edited. Multiple program blocks are defined. The program language is other than the

ladder. The label is used. The inline structured text is used. The MC/MCR instruction is used. The statement that exceeds 64 one-byte

characters is used. The note that exceeds 32 one-byte

characters is used. The text string constant that exceeds 32

one-byte characters is used. The peripheral statement/note is used. The line feed is used in the statement/note/

text string constant. The special character ($") is used in the text

string constant. The target program is a safety program. An FB or FUN is used.

Perform the following operations with the MELSOFT application, and write the program to the PLC CPU. Define one program block. Change the program language to the ladder. Delete the label. Delete the inline structured text. Delete the MC/MCR instruction. Delete the statement that exceeds 64 one-byte characters. Delete the note that exceeds 32 one-byte characters. Delete the text string constant that exceeds 32 one-byte

characters. Delete the peripheral statement/note. Delete the line feed in the statement/note/text string constant. Delete the special character ($") in the text string constant. Edit the safety program with the MELSOFT application. Delete the FB or FUN.

Error message Description Corrective action The data being edited is too large. Please reduce the data being edited.

Too many ladders are not converted. The data cannot be converted.

Reduce the ladders which are not converted before conversion.

There is a ladder which cannot be converted. Correct the ladder at the cursor position.

When a ladder block is converted, the ladder block is not completed.

Complete the ladder block, and then convert the ladder block.

The ladder block is too large to convert. Please reduce the size of the ladder block.

Too large ladder blocks are not converted. The data cannot be converted.

Delete or split the ladder block before conversion.

Adding/deleting ladder blocks is not allowed.

The number of ladder blocks in the edit area is different before and after the edit.

Edit the program so that the total number of ladder blocks and line statements in the edit area is the same before and after the edit, and then convert it.

Error message Description Corrective action

6 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action

4

Error messages for file selection

Error messages for user authentication

Error message Description Corrective action You cannot select programs other than ladder programs.

A program that is not a ladder program is selected.

Use the sequence program monitor (SFC) to monitor SFC programs.

Use GX Works2 or GX Developer to monitor SFC programs.

The specified file is too large to read. A program file having 260k steps or more is selected.

Split the program.

Function blocks or functions that cannot be displayed in the sequence program are used.

A security key or block password is set for the function blocks or functions.

A macro type function block file exists in the reading drive of the program file.

Delete the security key or block password set for the function block or function.

Delete the macro type function block file in the reading drive of the program file.

Error message Description Corrective action User authentication with PLC is not completed. Sequence program monitor cannot be used. Do you want to reset the connection status with the PLC and display the PLC Read screen?

The user authentication is cancelled when the sequence program monitor is restarted.

Execute the user authentication.

User authentication with PLC is not completed. Sequence program monitor cannot be used.

The user authentication is cancelled when GX Works3 is connected to the PLC CPU.

Execute the user authentication.

User authentication with PLC is not completed. This function cannot be used.

The user authentication is cancelled when GX Works3 is connected to the PLC CPU.

Execute the user authentication.

The user name or password does not match.

An incorrect user name or password is used for the authentication request to the PLC CPU.

Input the correct user name and password.

The access level does not match. An incorrect access level is specified to the user name used for the authentication request to the PLC CPU.

Specify the correct access level.

You cannot log on because the number of logged-on users exceeds the limit.

The user authentication cannot be executed because the number of log-on users exceeds the limit.

Reduce the number of log-on users.

Please wait for a while and execute again. The user authentication fails more than the specified times.

Wait for a while, and execute the user authentication.

4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action 187

18

MEMO

8 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action

5

5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)

Page 189 Features Page 192 Specifications Page 196 Operations for Display Page 205 How to Operate PLC Read Screen Page 211 How to Operate Block List Screen Page 213 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen Page 226 Test Operation Page 228 Error Messages and Corrective Action

5.1 Features With the sequence program monitor (SFC), the GOT can monitor SFC programs of controllers, and changing device values of the programs is available. The function improves the efficiency in troubleshooting and maintenance of PLC systems with SFC programs. The following shows features of the sequence program monitor (SFC).

Displaying SFC programs in SFC diagram format The GOT can monitor SFC programs of the PLC CPU and display the programs in the SFC diagram format (MELSAP3 or MELSAP-L format).

The following screens are displayed with the sequence program monitor (SFC). PLC read screen Page 205 How to Operate PLC Read Screen Block list screen Page 211 How to Operate Block List Screen SFC diagram monitor screen Page 213 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen

SFC diagram monitor screen